礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
《中部》· 《中部五十经注》巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Majjhimanikāye · Majjhimapaṇṇāsaṭīkā
1. 居士品复注巴利 1. Gahapativaggo
226 段
《坎达拉咖经》的注释巴利
1. Kandarakasuttavaṇṇanā
1 “园林、池塘等处”是指花园、池塘、园林、塔庙等地方。“遍布”就是数量很多。因为这里混杂着无忧树、迦尼迦罗树、黑檀树、昆比树、王树等,所以应当把这片瞻波林理解为被青、黄、赤、白、红五色花所庄严,而不是说只有瞻波树本身开五色花——论师们是这样说的。世尊住在花香馥郁的瞻波林中:这句话说明,并不是只有建城的时候那座城里才遍布瞻波树,后来也一直有很多。经文用“约五百又十二半”这样的说法,表示没有明确标出具体数目。“驯象者”就是训练大象的人,也就是驯象师;说“驯象师之子”指的就是他的儿子。那时,世尊为了让他们生起净信,并没有隐藏自己的佛陀威神力,就这样坐着。为了说明这一点,注疏说“六彩密集的佛陀光芒”等等。或者,是出于对世尊的恭敬,也就是说出于对世尊的尊重,也有读作“于世尊有恭敬”的。巴利
1.Ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsūti ārāmapokkharaṇīuyyānacetiyaṭṭhānādīsu. Ussannāti bahulā. Asokakaṇikārakoviḷārakumbhīrājarukkhehi sammissatāya taṃ campakavanaṃ nīlādipañcavaṇṇakusumapaṭimaṇḍitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na campakarukkhānaṃyeva nīlādipañcavaṇṇakusumatāyāti vadanti. Bhagavā kusumagandhasugandhe campakavane viharatīti iminā na māpanakāle eva tasmiṃ nagare campakarukkhā ussannā, atha kho aparabhāgepīti dasseti. ‘‘Pañcasatamattehi aḍḍhateḷasehī’’ti evaṃ adassitaparicchedena. Hatthino cāreti sikkhāpetīti hatthācariyo hatthīnaṃ sikkhāpako, tassa puttoti āha ‘‘hatthācariyassa putto’’ti. Tadā bhagavā tesaṃ pasādajananatthaṃ attano buddhānubhāvaṃ aniguhitvāva nisinnoti dassento ‘‘chabbaṇṇānaṃ ghanabuddharasmīna’’ntiādimāha. Bhagavato ceva gāravenāti bhagavato garubhāvena, bhagavati gāravenāti vā pāṭho.
“不是恒常存在”意思是并不经常出现,只是偶尔才有。这里说的“常”,是指频繁发生的常,不是指固定不变、永远坚住的常。世间人看到什么稀奇的事,也会挥手比划,或者弹指,经文就是针对这种情况说“适合弹指”。应当知道,“以前没有过而现在有了”这种说法,主要是依据世间约定俗成的用法来说的。比如巴利经文中说“乔达摩贤者,那些在过去时期曾经有过的……”等等。有些不该做的事,有人做了,因为极难做到而让人惊奇;同样,有些该做的事也是如此。前者是应当受到责备的稀有,后者是应当受到赞叹的稀有。为了按照经文语句分别显示这两种稀有,经文才说“在那里”等等。巴利
Niccaṃna hotīti abhiṇhaṃ na hoti, kadācideva hotīti attho. Abhiṇhaniccatā hi idha adhippetā, na kūṭaṭṭhaniccatā. Loke kiñci vimhayāvahaṃ disvā hatthavikārampi karonti, aṅguliṃ vā phoṭayanti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘accharaṃ paharituṃ yutta’’nti. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti ayaṃ niruttinayo yebhuyyena upādāya ruḷhīvasena vuttoti veditabbo. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yepi te, bho gotama, ahesuṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, kiñci akattabbampi kariyamānaṃ dukkarabhāvena vimhayāvahaṃ hoti, tathā kiñci kattabbaṃ, purimaṃ garahacchariyaṃ, pacchimaṃ pasaṃsacchariyaṃ, tadubhayaṃ suttapadaso dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“已被正行道所导”是指被安立在正道上。“此道为最上”就是以此为最上,这里用的是中性名词的抽象用法,就像“日月天子运转得不平正”那样(增支部4.70)。这里的意思是:世尊,比丘僧团已被您以正道引导;过去诸佛也同样是能这样完满地引导比丘僧团,未来诸佛也将同样是能这样完满地引导比丘僧团。这位游方者以所见到的部分为依据,从已见推知未见,从而显示:在一切佛陀的教法中,僧团的善行道就如同从中间剖开的金子,表里一致、平等无别。他这样显示的同时,也显示了那些僧团的善法性。而诸佛的善觉性,则是以它们自身的样貌显示出来的。“不逾于此”这一句,通过经文中“能这样完满地”这一限定,指出了被排除的部分。因为戒是定的基础,定是慧的基础,而在戒中又以增上行仪为首,所以说“以增上行仪的义务为开端”,以此说明最初的梵行。巴利
Sammā paṭipāditoti sammāpaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhapito. Esā paṭipadā paramāti etaparamaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoyaṃ yathā ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.70). Ayañhettha attho – bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho paṭipadāya tumhehi paṭipādito, atītepi kāle buddhā etaparamaṃyeva bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sammā paṭipādesuṃ, anāgatepi kāle etaparamaṃyeva bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sammā paṭipādessantīti paribbājako nayaggāhena diṭṭhena adiṭṭhaṃ anuminanto sabbesampi buddhānaṃ sāsane saṅghasuppaṭipattiṃ majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya samasamaṃ katvā dasseti, evaṃ dassento ca tesaṃ sudhammatañca tathā dasseti evāti veditabbo, buddhasubuddhatā pana nesaṃ sarūpeneva dassitāti. Na ito bhiyyoti iminā pāḷiyaṃ etaparamaṃyevāti avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti sīlapadaṭṭhānattā samādhissa, samādhipadaṭṭhānattā ca paññāya sīlepi ca abhisamācārikapubbakattā ādibrahmacariyakassa vuttaṃ ‘‘ābhisamācārikavattaṃ ādiṃ katvā’’ti.
2 在提问连结等部分,因为义理含摄无尽,说了“各自独立的连结”之后,为了让这个义理更清楚,就说了“据说世尊……”等话。寂静之因,就是证得寂静的原因。而这只有圣者才能了知,并且在这上面,也只有诸佛才能毫无遗漏地全然了知。为了通过反面和正面来显示这个义理,就说了“并非你……”等话。其中,亲族义利行应当依据《乌鸦本生》等来了知,世间义利行应当依据圆满各种巴拉密来了知,佛陀义利行应当依据《大菩提本生》等来了知。干达罗迦用“真是稀有啊,乔达摩尊者”等话,表达了他心中生起的净信。巴利
2. Pucchānusandhiādīsu anantogadhattā ‘‘pāṭiekko anusandhī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upasantakāraṇanti upasantabhāvakāraṇaṃ. Tañhi ariyānaṃyeva visayo, tatthāpi ca buddhānaṃ eva anavasesato visayoti imamatthaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca dassetuṃ na hi tvantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ñātatthacariyā kākajātakādivasena veditabbā, lokatthacariyā taṃtaṃpāramipūraṇavasena, buddhatthacariyā mahābodhijātakādivasena. Acchariyaṃ bho gotamātiādinā kandarakena kataṃ pasādapavedanaṃ dasseti.
世尊以“那些”等语,随喜并认可了干达罗迦所说的义理,因此论师说:“‘干达罗迦,确实有’——这也是一个独立的连结。”因为干达罗迦曾赞叹比丘僧团的寂静之德,世尊为了把它分别开示出来,即使对方没有请问,也随自己的意愿,以“确实有”等语开始说法。因此说:“据说世尊当时这样想……”等。“装点”是指把本来不是那样的自己,弄成另一番样子。“装扮”是指以可见的方式执取,所以说“以骗人的状态”等。“正在圆满行道者”——虽然一般而言有学圣者也被称为“正在圆满行道者”,但依已证之道的角度,他们不应被称为“正在圆满行道者”,因为所作已究竟。道是仅一刹那的,因此说“以上道之观慧而寂静”。从这解脱,即从由道而来的寂静解脱。这是针对善凡夫而说。因此说“以四念处而寂静”。巴利
Yepi tetiādinā tena vuttamatthaṃ paccanubhāsantena bhagavatā sampaṭicchitanti caritattā āha – ‘‘santi hi kandarakāti ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti . Yo hi kandarakena bhikkhusaṅghassa upasantabhāvo kittito, taṃ vibhajitvā dassentopi tena apucchitoyeva attano ajjhāsayena bhagavā ‘‘santi hī’’tiādinā desanaṃ ārabhi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavato kira etadahosī’’ tiādi. Kappetvāti aññathā santameva attānaṃ aññathā vidhāya. Pakappetvāti sanidassanavasena gahetvā. Tenāha ‘‘kuhakabhāvenā’’tiādi. Paṭipadaṃ pūrayamānāti kāmaṃ avisesena sekkhā vuccanti, te pana adhigatamaggavasena ‘‘pūrayamānā’’ti na vattabbā kiccassa niṭṭhitattā. Maggo hi ekacittakkhaṇikoti āha ‘‘uparimaggassa vipassanāya upasantā’’ti. Ito muttāti maggenāgatūpasamato muttā. Kalyāṇaputhujjane sandhāya vadati. Tenāha ‘‘catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi upasantā’’ti.
“恒常具戒”是指戒行不间断。这些人的戒在无残缺等方面确实更为殊胜。因为他们戒行极其清净,所以生活是持续不断的,因此称他们为“持续生活者”,所以说“这是它的同义词”。这样从戒行的角度解释了“持续生活者”这个词的含义之后,现在又从活命方式的角度来说明,所以说“意思是持续活命者”。教法的活命方式完全是依戒而住的,因此说“在那方面”等话。巴利
Satatasīlāti avicchinnasīlā. Sātisayo hi etesaṃ sīlassa akhaṇḍādibhāvo. Suparisuddhasīlatāvasena santatā vutti etesanti santatavuttinoti āha ‘‘tasseva vevacana’’nti. Evaṃ sīlavuttivasena ‘‘santatavuttino’’ti padassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni jīvitavuttivasena dassento ‘‘santatajīvikāvāti attho’’ti āha. Sāsanassa jīvitavutti sīlasannissitā evāti āha ‘‘tasmi’’ntiādi.
“Nipayati”的意思是让贪等烦恼干枯、耗尽,或者由此使自己沉入、证入,所以叫“nipako”,也就是有智慧的人。因此说“有慧者”。为了说明安住在智慧上、舍弃佛陀所呵斥的邪命、以正命来维持生活,就说了“如有一类”等话。其中应当说明的内容,要依照《清净道论》及其《大复注》里所说的方法来理解。《车乘分别行道》等,要依照各部经典里所说的方法来理解。此外,在《大牧牛人经》等中,说的是出世间念处。所以说:“然而,这里说的是世间与出世间混合的念处。”在《念处经》中,同样也是混合而说的。“以如此之多”,就是指以这些教说。巴利
Nipayati visoseti rāgādisaṃkilesaṃ, tato vā attānaṃ nipātīti nipako, paññavā. Tenāha ‘‘paññavanto’’ti. Paññāya ṭhatvā jīvikākappanaṃ nāma buddhapaṭikuṭṭhamicchājīvaṃ pahāya sammājīvena jīvananti taṃ dassento ‘‘yathā ekacco’’tiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.14) taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Rathavinītapaṭipadādayo tesu tesu suttesu vuttanayena veditabbā. Ito aññattha mahāgopālakasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.346 ādayo) lokuttarasatipaṭṭhānā kathitāti āha – ‘‘idha pana lokiyalokuttaramissakā satipaṭṭhānā kathitā’’ti, satipaṭṭhānasuttepi (dī. ni. 2.373-374; ma. ni. 1.106 ādayo) vomissakāva kathitāti. Ettakenāti ettakāya desanāya.
3 “作者状态”指的是在修行实践中的修行者状态。我们这些在家众,虽然事务繁多,也时常让心安住在念处上,更何况那些住在远离处的修行者呢?这样表明自己的作者状态,同时也赞叹了比丘僧团。因此说“这里的意思就是”等等。贪等烦恼在各种所缘上不断生起,以稠密纠缠的方式现起,这就是被烦恼稠林所困的状态。所以说:“内有结,外有结,众生被结所缚。”(《相应部》1.23, 192)为了说明执取人们的意趣就会有诡诈,所以说“对渣滓和诡诈也是如此”。就像酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆等里面的杂质,那叫“渣滓”;同样,心相续中不清净的染污状态就叫渣滓。所以说“以不清净之义为渣滓性”。在自己身上生起本来不存在的功德想,这就是狡诈的意思。“他知道”是指他省察、开示:“这个没有利益,不应该去做;这个有利益,应该去做。”因为“知道”这个词也有省察的意思,比如说“尊者知道”。这一切……(中略)……所指的是,就像在“养畜者”等例子中那样。这里“antara”这个词,就像在“vijjantarikāya”(明之间)等中的用法一样,是“刹那”的意思,所以说“以那一刹那”。以那——指以那头象。那些——指诡诈等。巴利
3.Kārakabhāvanti paṭipattiyaṃ paṭipajjanakabhāvaṃ. Mayampi nāma gihī bahukiccā samānā kālena kālaṃ satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacittā viharāma, kimaṅgaṃ pana vivekavāsinoti attano kārakabhāvaṃ pavedento evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghañca ukkhipati. Tenāha ‘‘ayañhettha adhippāyo’’tiādi. Nānārammaṇesu aparāparaṃ uppajjamānānaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ ghanajaṭitasaṅkhātākārena pavatti kilesagahanena gahanatā, tenāha ‘‘anto jaṭā bahi jaṭā, jaṭāya jaṭitā pajā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192). Manussānaṃ ajjhāsayagahaṇena sāṭheyyampīti dassento āha ‘‘kasaṭasāṭheyyesupi eseva nayo’’ti. Yathā sappimadhuphāṇitādīsu kacavarabhāvo, so kasaṭoti vuccati, evaṃ santāne aparisuddho saṃkilesabhāvo kasaṭanti āha ‘‘aparisuddhaṭṭhena kasaṭatā’’ti. Attani asantaguṇasambhāvanaṃ kerāṭiyaṭṭho. Jānātīti ‘‘idaṃ ahitaṃ na sevitabbaṃ, idaṃ hitaṃ sevitabba’’nti vicāreti deseti. Vicāraṇatthopi hi hoti jānāti-saddo yathā ‘‘āyasmā jānātī’’ti. Sabbāpi…pe… adhippetā ‘‘pasupālakā’’tiādīsu viya. Idha antara-saddo ‘‘vijjantarikāyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) viya khaṇatthoti āha ‘‘yattakena khaṇenā’’ti. Tenāti hatthinā. Tānīti sāṭheyyādīni.
从意义上说,它们正是与贪俱生之心生起的活动方式中,直接与身正直、心正直相反的状态。为了通过活动方式来显示它们,才说了“其中”等话。其中,“对此者”,指的是某个有情,或是马,或是象。“我将站着”,并不是说真的走到那个有危险的地方去站着。这是因为他有欺骗的意图,所以把此人的诡诈表现出来。正因如此,在四种场合中都只说“欺骗之后”;如果他想隐瞒,就会真的走到那里站着了。其余各种情况也应按这个道理理解。“想登上回程路的人”,是指想折返、沿原路走回去的人。在排便等事情上,并没有等待时机的念头,用“如是”来总结这一点。巴利
Atthato kāyacittujukatāpaṭipakkhabhūtāva lobhasahagatacittuppādassa pavattiākāravisesāti tāni pavattiākārena dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yassāti pāṇabhūtassa assassa vā hatthino vā. Ṭhassāmīti tattheva sappaṭibhaye ṭhāne gantvā ṭhassāmīti na hoti. Imassa sāṭheyyatāya pākaṭakaraṇaṃ vañcanādhippāyabhāvato. Tathā hi catūsu ṭhānesu ‘‘vañcetvā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, niguhanto pana tattheva gantvā tiṭṭheyya. Esa nayo sesesupi. Paṭimaggaṃ ārohitukāmassāti āgatamaggameva nivattitvā gantukāmassa. Leṇḍavissajjanādīsu kālantarāpekkhābhāvaṃ ‘‘tathā’’ti iminā upasaṃharati.
“家内生”是指在自家婢女肚子里出生。“以财买”是指给了钱之后,以奴婢的身份收来。“随军带来的”是指以奴婢的身份,被当作军队的战利品抓来的。“奴婢身份”就是奴婢的状态。“仆役”是指本来不是奴婢,却做服侍工作的人。“舍弃这个”是指放下这个已经落到自己手里的东西。“拿这个”是指抓住已经落到对方手里的这个东西。应当知道,这是说他们当面是一套,背后在身体行为和言语表现上,显露出他们的心处在另一种状态。巴利
Antojātakāti attano dāsiyā kucchimhi jātā. Dhanakkītāti dhanaṃ datvā dāsabhāvena gahitā. Karamarānītāti dāsabhāvena karamaraggāhagahitā. Dāsabyanti dāsabhāvaṃ. Pessāti adāsā eva hutvā veyyāvaccakarā. Imaṃ vissajjetvāti imaṃ attano hatthagataṃ vissajjetvā. Imaṃgaṇhantāti imaṃ tassa hatthagataṃ gaṇhantā. Sammukhato aññathā parammukhakāle kāyavācāsamudācāradassaneneva cittassa nesaṃ aññathā ṭhitabhāvo niddiṭṭhoti veditabbo.
4 这个也是单独的连接。在这里,同样要依照紧接前文所说的方法来理解连接的安立。因此说“因为这个”等。“第四种(人)是已实践利益行道者”——这是连接。为了以人为主来显示人的行道,所以说“舍弃人”。因为这里应当舍弃的是行道,而不是人。正如通过远离无信等人,信根等的修习才能成就;同样,通过远离行邪道的人,就应当避免邪道。所以说“舍弃前三种人”。对于第四种人——也就是这个四法组中所说的第四种人——我只是为了表明令他进入并实践利益行道。“santā”的意思是达到寂灭、消灭、灭尽——这是这里的含义,所以说“已灭尽者称为santā”。再者,“santā”因为通过修习而脱离了烦恼的热恼,所以有清凉的意思——这是这里的含义,因此说“已寂止的”。“santā”要这样连接起来理解。在“santo have”这里,以能产生平等性的、作为贤善状态之特殊条件的智慧而具足的圣者们,被称为“santo”。所以说:“santo have……paṇḍitā”。巴利
4.Ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhīti etthāpi anantare vuttanayeneva anusandhiyojanā veditabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi. Catuttho hitapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannoti yojanā. Puggalasīsena puggalapaṭipattiṃ dassento ‘‘puggale pahāyā’’ti āha. Paṭipatti hi idha pahātabbā, na puggalā. Yathā assaddhādipuggalaparivajjanena saddhindriyādibhāvanā ijjhanti, evaṃ micchāpaṭipannapuggalaparivajjanena micchāpaṭipadā vajjitabbāti āha – ‘‘purime tayo puggale pahāyā’’ti. Catutthapuggalassāti imasmiṃ catukke vuttacatutthapuggalassa hitapaṭipattiyaṃyeva paṭipādemi pavattemīti dassento. Santāti samaṃ vināsaṃ nirodhaṃ pattāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘niruddhā santāti vuttā’’ti. Puna santāti bhāvanāvasena kilesapariḷāhavigamato santāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘nibbutā’’ti. Santāti ānetvā yojanā. Santo haveti ettha samabhāvakarena sādhubhāvassa visesapaccayabhūtena paṇḍiccena samannāgatā ariyā ‘‘santo’’ti vuttāti āha – ‘‘santo have…pe… paṇḍitā’’ti.
“我慢被安置在这里”,所以叫“我”,也就是这个自体。但在这里,凡是并非他人的,那就是“我”,也就是那个我。“他人”是指不同于自己的。由于是饥饿之因,饥饿被称为渴爱。“内在燃烧的烦恼”是指在自身相续中,能让自己焦灼、燃烧的烦恼。“令心满意”就是让心生净信,让它欢喜的意思。然而,因为处于那种状态而成就心、执取意乐的人,所以说“令心满意”等等。巴利
Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.198) attabhāvo, idha pana yo paro na hoti, so attā, taṃ attānaṃ. Paranti attato aññaṃ. Chātaṃ vuccati taṇhā jighacchāhetutāya. Anto tāpanakilesānanti attano santāne attapariḷāhajananasantappanakilesānaṃ. Cittaṃ ārādhetīti cittaṃ pasādeti, sampahaṃsetīti attho. Yasmā pana tathābhūto cittaṃ sampādento ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhanto nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittaṃ sampādetī’’tiādi.
5 苦是违逆的、可厌的,对这个人来说就是如此,所以叫“于苦违逆”,他就是那个于苦违逆者。因为修饰语和被修饰语之间的关系本来就可以灵活变通。不过注释书是着眼于苦作为被修饰的对象,不采用有财释,而把意思说成“对苦的违逆”。因为凭着苦对该人而言是违逆的那一分,凭着那一分,该人也就成为苦的违逆者。因此说“立于敌对”。巴利
5. Dukkhaṃ paṭikkūlaṃ jegucchaṃ etassāti dukkhapaṭikkūlo taṃ dukkhapaṭikkūlaṃ. Visesanavisesitabbatā hi kāmacārā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dukkhassa visesitabbataṃ sandhāya bāhiratthasamāsaṃ anādiyitvā ‘‘dukkhassa paṭikkūla’’nti attho vutto. Yena hi bhāgena purisassa dukkhaṃ paṭikkūlaṃ, tena dukkhassa purisopīti. Tenāha – ‘‘paccanīkasaṇṭhita’’nti.
6 由四种原因,就是由界善巧等四种原因。造业,就是从事瑜伽业。因为诸正自觉者为了让他人证得道果而发起精进,在这件事上总是不间断地投入、专心致志,依靠他们,那些人就不会有障碍,所以说“而非依靠佛陀”。这是因为说法者或那个人自身的功用减退了,也就是缺少相应的加行。“或者说法者的”这一句,应当从声闻弟子的角度来理解。“以大利”这里,“义”这个词是“功德利益”的同义词,所以说“以两种功德利益”。他生起净信,是因为听闻了以“阿拉汉”等开头的、关于僧团善行的教导。“新的理趣生起”,这是指以恒常持戒等、以不自苦等为首。他听了之后,对奴隶等特别有惭耻心、有悲悯、希望利益、富有同情,在成就有学行道之戒的过程中,渐次修习、圆满念处。因此世尊说:“与大义相应”。巴利
6.Catūhikāraṇehīti dhātukusalatādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi. Kammaṃ karotīti yogakammaṃ karoti. Yasmā sambuddhā paresaṃ maggaphalādhigamāya ussāhajātā, tattha nirantaraṃ yuttappayuttā eva honti, te paṭicca tesaṃ antarāyo na hotiyevāti āha ‘‘na pana buddhe paṭiccā’’ti. Kiriyaparihāniyā desakassa tasseva vā puggalassa tajjapayogābhāvato. ‘‘Desakassa vā’’ti idaṃ sāvakānaṃ vasena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahatā atthenāti ettha attha-saddo ānisaṃsapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dvīhi ānisaṃsehī’’ti. Pasādaṃ paṭilabhati ‘‘arahanto’’tiādinā saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā sutattā. Abhinavo nayo udapādi santatasīlatādivasena anattantapatādivasena, sopi taṃ sutvā dāsādīsu savisesaṃ lajjī dayāpanno hitānukampī hutvā sekkhapaṭipadaṃ sīlaṃ sādhento anukkamena satipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ paribrūheti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘mahatā atthena saṃyutto’’ti.
8 以杀害、屠杀等方式让人哭泣,所以叫“残忍”;同样,以伤害的方式撕裂他人的身心,所以叫“暴恶”;因为言语对立冲突,所以叫“粗戾”;被安置在牢狱中任职,所以叫“牢狱卒”。巴利
8. Paresaṃ hananaghātanādinā rodāpanato luddo, tathā vighātakabhāvena kāyacittānaṃ vidāraṇato dāruṇo, viruddhavādatāya kakkhaḷo, bandhanāgāre niyutto bandhanāgāriko.
9 以刹帝利灌顶,是指为刹帝利举行的灌顶仪式。集会堂,是指用铺设布置而成的大厅,也就是祭祀的场地。以酥油,是指用酥做成的油;那时他确实用双份的油涂抹身体。度过犊子阶段而站立的,就是已过犊子期、进入青年期的牛。为了作围绕之用,是指用树木花鬘连同香茅草一起围绕祭坛边缘。于祭祀地,是指在举行祭祀的其他地方。这里其余没有详细解释的内容,其含义本身已经很容易理解。巴利
9.Khattiyābhisekenāti khattiyānaṃ kattabbaabhisekena. Santhāgāranti santhāravasena kataṃ agāraṃ yaññāvāṭaṃ. Sappitelenāti sappimayena telena, yamakasnehena hi tadā kāyaṃ abbhañjati. Vacchabhāvaṃ taritvā ṭhito vacchataro. Parikkhepakaraṇatthāyāti vanamālāhi saddhiṃ dabbhehi vediyā parikkhepanatthāya. Yaññabhūmiyanti avasesayaññaṭṭhāne. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《八城经》的注释巴利
2. Aṭṭhakanāgarasuttavaṇṇanā
17 “在附近”这个说法,通过经文里的“在毗舍离”,表明这是表示附近处所的位格。“上等精华家族的计数”,是指对极为显赫、极为上等家族的计数。“在第十个位置”,是指在“另外的、不同的”这种十进制的计数位置上。出生在八城的人被称为八城人。“鸡园”是华氏城的鸡园,不是憍赏弥的那个。巴利
17.Avidūreti iminā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vesāliya’’nti idaṃ samīpe bhummavacananti dasseti. Sārappattakulagaṇanāyāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.11.16) mahāsāramahappattakulagaṇanāya. Dasame ṭhāneti aññe aññeti dasagaṇanaṭṭhāne. Aṭṭhakanagare jāto bhavo aṭṭhakanāgaro. Kukkuṭārāmoti pāṭaliputte kukkuṭārāmo, na kosambiyaṃ.
18 18. 在“已明之义的说明”中,“那个”一词,是指由“世尊”等词语以同位关系所说的那位——世尊因为那样的正觉状态而著称、证得、广为人知。为了显示这个正觉状态连同趣入的修行之道这一实义,所以说“那位……正觉者”。虽然“智”和“见”这些词在这里都是智慧的同义词,但为了显示它们因各自不同的殊胜而作用于不同对象,便从不共智的殊胜、三明、明与神通及无碍智、一切知智与肉眼、以及通达智与教说智等方面来配合解释其含义,因此说了“那些那些”等语。其中,“以了知众生志向与随眠而了知”是指以了知志向与随眠的智慧;“以看见一切所知之法”是指以一切知智和无碍智;“以宿住等”是指以宿命智和漏尽智;“以通达慧”是指以圣道慧;“以教说慧而看见”是指以说法之慧,如实看见应教之法应当如何教导,以及应度化众生的志向、随眠、行为、意乐等种种差别。“诸敌人”指烦恼敌,或五种魔,或教法之敌——外道;对他们“杀灭、击垮”是指以教诫神变降伏他们、使他们无法应对,或者只是置之不理。《髻者经》在此可作为例证。巴利
18. Pakatatthaniddeso ta-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttassa yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato adhigato supākaṭo ca, taṃ abhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanīyapaṭipadāya atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so…pe… abhisambuddho’’ti āha. Satipi ñāṇadassana-saddānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena tesaṃ visayavisese pavattidassanatthaṃ asādhāraṇañāṇavisesavasena vijjāttayavasena vijjāabhiññānāvaraṇañāṇavasena sabbaññutañāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena ca tadatthaṃ yojetvā dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āsayānusayaṃ jānatā āsayānusayañāṇena sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ passatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi. Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Desanāpaññāya passatāti desetabbadhammānaṃ desetabbappakāraṃ bodhaneyyapuggalānañca āsayānusayacaritādhimuttiādibhedaṃ dhammadesanāpaññāya yāthāvato passatā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcavidhamārānaṃ vā, sāsanassa vā paccatthikānaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ tesaṃ pana hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ ajjhupekkhanameva vā, kesivinayasuttañcettha nidassanaṃ.
同样地,也可以按十力和十八不共佛法来这样搭配解释:以了知处非处等种种分别,所以是“知者”;以能看见众生随业往生,所以是“见者”;因为诸漏连同习气都已断尽,所以是“阿拉汉”;对于应遍知等种种法,能以应遍知等方式无颠倒地觉悟,所以是“正自觉者”。或者也可以这样理解:因为对过去、现在、未来三时的智慧都无碍,所以是“知者”;因为身业等三业都有智慧相随、经过审慎思量而行,所以是“见者”;因为具备舍断成就,能证明戏笑等放逸不存在,所以是“阿拉汉”;因为以欲等不减退为因,成就无尽辩才的一切知性,所以是“正自觉者”。巴利
Tathā ṭhānāṭṭhānādivibhāgaṃ jānatā yathākammūpagasatte passatā, savāsanānaṃ āsavānaṃ khīṇattā arahatā, abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhato sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, kāyakammādivasena tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ ñāṇānuparivattito nisammakāritāya passatā, davādīnaṃ abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya akkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ dasabalaaṭṭhārasaāveṇikabuddhadhammavasenapi yojanā kātabbā.
19 “已作”是指由自己的种种缘共同和合、现前聚集而造作出来的。它“被造作”的状态应当从生起来理解,而不是对已经生起的东西再加以构造,所以说“已令生起”。为了说明那些缘以思心所为最重要,经中说“已作、已思念”,因此解释为“已思、已策划”的意思。说“已作、已思念”,是通过禅那现前这一点来指出它终将坏灭的性质——因为凡是原本没有而后来生起的,生起之后终归会消失。所以经中说“已作”等。“安住于止观法”是指:由于安住在止的修习中,心得定;生起观之后,以无常随观等方法舍弃常想等颠倒认知,逐渐达到随顺智,这时就称为安住在观的修习中。在称为止和观的这些法里面,以染着的意义称为“贪”,以欢喜的意义称为“喜”。这里说的是微细的期许,也就是所谓的“欲染”。巴利
19.Abhisaṅkhatanti attano paccayehi abhisammukhabhāvena samecca sambhūyya kataṃ, svassa katabhāvo uppādanena veditabbo, na uppannassa paṭisaṅkharaṇenāti āha ‘‘uppādita’’nti. Te cassa paccayā cetanāpadhānāti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘abhisaṅkhataṃ abhisañcetayita’’nti vuttanti ‘‘cetayitaṃ pakappita’’nti atthamāha. Abhisaṅkhataṃ abhisañcetayitanti ca jhānassa pātubhāvadassanamukhena viddhaṃsanabhāvaṃ ulliṅgeti yañhi ahutvā sambhavati, taṃ hutvā paṭiveti. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘abhisaṅkhata’ntiādi. Samathavipassanādhamme ṭhitoti samathadhamme ṭhitattā samāhito vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā aniccānupassanādīhi niccasaññādayo pajahanto anukkamena taṃ anulomañāṇaṃ pāpetā hutvā vipassanādhamme ṭhito. Samathavipassanāsaṅkhātesu dhammesu rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, nandanaṭṭhena nandīti. Tattha sukhumā apekkhā vuttā, yā ‘‘nikantī’’ti vuccati.
如果只是按照字面来理解这段经文,那么就成了这样:应当在止和观中修习欲贪——也就是说,先证得不来果之后,就不再为了这个目的修止和观,而仅仅对止观生起欲贪就行了。为什么呢?因为如果对那些称为止和观的法,仅仅凭欲贪,不来者所能证得的果,尚未证得不来果的人也能证得的话,那么在这种情况下,他就等于已经证得不来果了。所以经文说“不来果将被通达”。因为应当按其自性去品味,所以不颠倒的意义本身就是“义味”。“还有其他什么善趣”,是就那些会堕落的众生说的。“还有其他什么恶趣”,指的是阿修罗道。巴利
Evaṃ santeti evaṃ yathārutavasena ca imassa suttapadassa atthe gahetabbe sati. Samathavipassanāsu chandarāgo kattabboti anāgāmiphalaṃ nibbattetvā tadatthāya samathavipassanāpi anibbattetvā kevalaṃ tattha chandarāgo kattabbo bhavissati. Kasmā? Tesu samathavipassanāsaṅkhātesu dhammesu chandarāgamattena anāgāminā laddhabbassa aladdhānāgāmiphalena laddhabbattā tathā sati tena anāgāmiphalampi laddhabbameva nāma hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘anāgāmiphalaṃ paṭividdhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Sabhāvato rasitabbattā aviparīto attho eva attharaso. Aññāpi kāci sugatiyoti vinipātike sandhāyāha. Aññāpi kāci duggatiyoti asurakāyamāha.
这段教法之所以以“止”为重心,是因为它是为修止的行者而说的。《大玛伦亚之子教诫》里,先以“远离不善法,有寻有伺”作为基础禅那,再通过“凡在那里属于色、属于受”等语句展开观,最后说“他安住其中,证得诸漏灭尽”,因此说“《大玛伦亚之子教诫》以观为重心”。在《大念处经》中,从头到尾都以极为锐利的观来说,所以说“宣说了以观为最上”。在《身至念经》中,则特别依出入息禅那等来说明止与观,所以说“宣说了以止为最上”。巴利
Samathadhurameva dhuraṃ samathayānikassa vasena desanāya āgatattā. Mahāmālukyovāde ‘‘vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti pādakajjhānaṃ katvā ‘‘so yadeva tattha hoti rūpagataṃ vedanāgata’’ntiādinā vipassanaṃ vitthāretvā ‘‘so tattha ṭhito āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.133) āgatattā ‘‘mahāmālukyovāde vipassanāva dhura’’nti āha. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte (dī. ni. 2.373 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.106 ādayo) sabbatthakameva tikkhatarāya vipassanāya āgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanuttaraṃ kathita’’nti. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153-154) ānāpānajjhānādivasena savisesaṃ samathavipassanāya āgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘samathuttaraṃ kathita’’nti.
就像一位胸怀宽广的人,别人只求一点点,他却给了很多;同样,当有人只问一个法,而回答却说“这也是一个法”,于是从提问的方式看,十一个法就成了“一个法”;又从每一句各自圆满表达一项义理的方式看,也成了“一个法”。再者,以这些法所修习的那条道路,因为同一形相,所以从“道”的角度看,二十一章也成为“一个法”。这里所说的是这部《八城经》。在这部经中,由于非想非非想处的诸法已经达到仅存行的极微细状态,声闻弟子在那里难以修作,所以这里的开示没有按第四无色定的方式来宣说,而是依据四梵住、前三种无色定以及前四禅,共说了十一个法。所谓“依据提问的方式”,就是指像“尊者阿难,是否有一个法,由那位……正自觉者所宣说?”这样提出的问题。“为了不死的生起”的意思,是作为不死生起的原因;一切业处虽然同为一味,但都是证得不死的修行道路,这就是它的含义。因此,在这里,从明确呈现的形态来看,只出现了最高果地和不来果地这两个阶位;然而从彼此无间隔的角度来说,下面那两个阶位在义理上其实也已经包含在内,应当这样理解。巴利
Appaṃ yācitena bahuṃ dentena uḷārapurisena viya ekaṃ dhammaṃ pucchitena ‘‘ayampi ekadhammo’’tikathitattā ekādasapi dhammā pucchāvasena ekadhammo nāma jāto paccekaṃ vākyaparisamāpanañāyena. Ekavīsati pabbāni tehi bodhiyamānāya paṭipadāya ekarūpattā paṭipadāvasena ekadhammo nāma jātoti. Idha imasmiṃ aṭṭhakanāgarasutte. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanadhammānaṃ saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattatāya tattha sāvakānaṃ dukkaranti na catutthāruppavasenettha desanā āgatāti catunnaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ, heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ āruppānañca vasena ekādasa. Pucchāvasenāti ‘‘atthi nu kho, bhante ānanda, tena…pe… sammāsambuddhena ekadhammo akkhāto’’ti (ma. ni. 2.18) evaṃ pavattapucchāvasena. Amatuppattiyatthenāti amatabhāvassa uppattihetutāya, sabbānipi kammaṭṭhānāni ekarasampi amatādhigamapaṭipattiyāti attho, evamettha aggaphalabhūmi anāgāmiphalabhūmīti dveva bhūmiyo sarūpato āgatā, nānantariyatāya pana heṭṭhimāpi dve bhūmiyo atthato āgatā evāti daṭṭhabbā.
21 五百:它的价值是五百,所以叫五百。剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。巴利
21. Pañca satāni aggho etassāti pañcasataṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
3. 《有学经》的注释巴利
3. Sekhasuttavaṇṇanā
22 22. “集会堂”是指讲说义理的堂舍。因此说“在出发的时候等”,其中“等”字应当理解为包含吉祥大会等。“Santhambhanti”是休息、消除疲劳的意思。“Saha”是指依住处而聚在一处。在“一起讲说义理的堂舍”这个意思上,把“ttha”变成“ntha”,所以说成“santhāgāra”,应当这样理解。“Santharanti”是指以商谈的方式停留。巴利
22.Santhāgāranti atthānusāsanāgāraṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘uyyogakālādīsū’’tiādi. Ādi-saddena maṅgalamahādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Santhambhantīti vissamanti, parissamaṃ vinodentīti attho. Sahāti sannivesavasena ekajjhaṃ. Saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāranti etasmiṃ atthe ttha-kārassa ntha-kāraṃ katvā santhāgāranti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Santharantīti sammantanavasena tiṭṭhanti.
三藏佛语本身就会传来,所以以佛语传来为标题,也就等于说了圣果法的传来;对那些在那里住一整夜的人,果等至会被受用。如果说在那个比丘僧团里,有善凡夫在努力修行观法呢?圣道法确实在那里传来。巴利
Tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āgatameva bhavissatīti buddhavacanassa āgamanasīsena ariyaphaladhammānampi āgamanaṃ vuttameva, tiyāmarattiṃ tattha vasantānaṃ phalasamāpattivaḷañjanaṃ hotīti. Tasmiñca bhikkhusaṅghe kalyāṇaputhujjanā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpentā hontīti ce? Ariyamaggadhammānaṃ tattha āgamanaṃ hotiyeva.
用新鲜牛粪,就是用清澈的新鲜牛粪汁。擦掉,就是涂抹。四种香,就是把零陵香、藏红花、大麦花、暗罗叶等磨碎做成香,用这些香涂成各种颜色,也就是青等不同颜色,不是按墙壁不同来分。若按墙壁不同来分,那就只是各种形状的图案了。大背毯,是说要铺在象背上的、因此被称为“大背”的那种毯子,他们叫它kojava。不过这是针对一种铺盖说的,即铺在象身上、饰有象形图案的。马毯、狮毯等,也是饰有马、狮等形像的铺盖;杂色毯则是用种种图案以及种种花鬘工艺等装饰的铺盖。巴利
Allagomayenāti acchena allagomayarasena. Opuñchāpetvāti vilimpitvā. Catujjātiyagandhehīti tagarakuṅkumayavanapupphatamālapattāni pisitvā katagandhehi nānāvaṇṇeti nīlādivasena nānāvaṇṇe, na bhittivisesavasena. Bhittivisesavasena pana nānāsaṇṭhānarūpameva. Mahāpiṭṭhikakojavaketi hatthipiṭṭhīsu attharitabbatāya mahāpiṭṭhikāti laddhasamaññe kojaveti vadanti. Kuttake pana sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ hatthattharaṇā hatthirūpavicittā. Assattharakasīhattharakādayopi assasīharūpādivicittā eva attharakā, cittattharakaṃ nānārūpehi ceva nānāvidhamālākammādīhi ca vicittaṃ attharakaṃ.
所谓靠垫,就是放下来作为依靠的东西,也就是以依靠物的状态放置。用香做成的花环叫香鬘,用暗罗叶等做成的叫叶鬘。这里“等”字还包括用朱砂、荜澄茄、肉豆蔻、肉豆蔻花等做成的鬘。做成结跏趺座形状的坐具叫结跏趺座;三面有靠背,或者只有一面有靠背的,叫有靠背的靠座;没有靠背的,叫无靠背的座。yojanāvaṭṭeti 的意思是周围一由旬。巴利
Upadhānanti apassayanaṃ upadahitvāti apassayayoggabhāvena ṭhapetvā gandhehi katamālā gandhadāmaṃ, tamālapattādīhi kataṃ pattadāmaṃ. Ādi-saddena hiṅgulatakkolajātiphalajātipupphādīhi katadāmaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pallaṅkākārena katapīṭhaṃ pallaṅkapīṭhaṃ, tīsu passesu, ekapasse eva vā saupassayaṃ apassayapīṭhaṃ, anapassayaṃ muṇḍapīṭhaṃ yojanāvaṭṭeti yojanaparikkhepe.
“整理好”是指把安陀会的角和另一边弄平对齐、穿整齐。因此说“像用剪刀剪莲花一样”,是指遮住三轮。这里,因为诸佛的色身圆满和威仪圆满都达到了极致,所以为了显示世尊当时就是这样庄严,才说了“以金项链……”等话。其中,通过“以无与伦比的佛衣”等话,说明当时世尊并非因为要隐藏佛的威力才那样做,而是为了令聚集在那里的天、人、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等生起信心,就以自己本来的自然威仪进入了迦毗罗卫城。诸佛的身光通常只遍照约八十肘的范围,所以说“照亮了八十肘处”。这就是青、黄、赤、白、茜等六色佛光。巴利
Saṃvidhāyāti antaravāsakassa koṇapadesañca itarapadesañca samaṃ katvā vidhāya. Tenāha – ‘‘kattariyā padumaṃ kantanto viyā’’ti timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentoti ettha ca yasmā buddhānaṃ rūpasampadā viya ākappasampadāpi paramukkaṃsagatā, tasmā tadā bhagavā evaṃ sobhatīti dassento ‘‘suvaṇṇapāmaṅgenā’’tiādimāha, tattha asamena buddhavesenātiādinā tadā bhagavā buddhānubhāvassa niguhaṇe kāraṇābhāvato tattha sannipatitadevamanussanāgayakkhagandhabbādīnaṃ pasādajananatthaṃ attano sabhāvapakatikiriyāyeva kapilavatthuṃ pāvisīti dasseti. Buddhānaṃ kāyappabhā nāma pakatiyā asītihatthamattameva padesaṃ pharatīti āha – ‘‘asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesī’’ti nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassarānaṃ vasena chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo.
从根部开始一直到顶端都开满了花,完全绽放。“依次排列放置”等,是比喻的构想。就像精心装饰过的另一件东西光彩夺目那样,由于以三十种巴拉密所成就,世尊也同样光彩夺目——这就是这段话要表达的意思。“二十五条河”:指恒河等,以旃陀跋伽河为最后一条的二十五条大河。“汇合”:汇合、交融之后,在入口处,也就是流入大海的地方。巴利
Sabbapāliphulloti mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā phullo vikasito. Paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānantiādi parikappūpamā. Yathā taṃ…pe… alaṅkataṃ añño virocati, evaṃ virocittha, samatiṃsāya pāramitāhi abhisaṅkhatattā evaṃ virocitthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pañcavīsatiyā nadīnanti gaṅgādīnaṃ candabhāgāpariyosānānaṃ pañcavīsatiyā mahānadīnaṃ. Sambhijjāti sambhedaṃ missībhāvaṃ patvā mukhadvāreti samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne.
天、人、龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、夜叉等众生的眼睛,这只是依照想象来说的。以一千(颂)的意思,就是以一千句颂文,也就是一部有一诵分量的著作,这就是它的含义。巴利
Devamanussanāgasupaṇṇagandhabbayakkhādīnaṃ akkhīnīti cetaṃ parikappanavasena vuttaṃ. Sahassenāti padasahassena, bhāṇavārappamāṇena ganthenāti attho.
令大地震动,是说自己以功德殊胜而引发大地震动,即使如此也不伤害众生。因为诸佛是堪受供养者,所以先抬起右脚。以善安立的脚,平稳地触地。虽然平稳触地,却不被尘土沾染,因为皮肤细滑。低处隆起、高处平坦等等,是诸佛获得名为善安立足的大人相所带来的等流果。不太远地抬起,是说抬脚时不会抬得太远。也不太近地放下,是说落脚时不会放得太近,就这样行走。令包括诸天神在内的世间欢喜、满足。以四足行走,所以称为四足行者。巴利
Kampayanto vasundharanti attano guṇavisesehi pathavīkampaṃ uppādento, evaṃbhūtopi aheṭhayanto pāṇāni. Sabbadakkhiṇattā buddhānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uddharanto. Samaṃ samphusate bhūmiṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya. Yadipi bhūmiṃ samaṃ phusati, rajasānupalippati sukhumattā chaviyā. Ninnaṭṭhānaṃ unnamatītiādi buddhānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādasaṅkhātassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭilābhassa nissandaphalaṃ. Nātidūre uddharatīti atidūre ṭhapetuṃ na uddharati. Naccāsanne ca nikkhipanti accāsanne ca ṭhāne anikkhipanto niyyāti. Hāsayanto sadevake loke tosayanto. Catūhi pādehi caratīti catucārī.
据说,这段称为“称叹之时”,是因为要彰显佛陀的威力才说的。不论是讲述佛陀的身相还是功德,都不该说这是“不善说”。为什么呢?因为诸佛世尊的功德无量无边,对于懂得这一点的人来说,赞叹佛陀的功德,本身就是如法的赞叹,自然就契入其中了。巴利
Buddhānubhāvassa pakāsanavasena gatattā vaṇṇakālo nāma kiresa. Sarīravaṇṇe vā guṇavaṇṇe vā kathiyamāne dukkathitanti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Aparimāṇavaṇṇā hi buddhā bhagavanto, buddhaguṇasaṃvaṇṇanā jānantassa yathādhammasaṃvaṇṇanaṃyeva anupavisatīti.
用细布头巾,是指用扎起来拿着的细布衣。象步而行,是指像象王那样落脚。具足百福之相,是指具有由数百种福德所成就的大人相。犹如宝珠照耀,是指极其光辉闪耀,像宝珠一样,有些人把这种特别的宝珠叫作“照耀”。犹如大娑罗树,是指像巨大的娑罗树,或者像黑檀等大树。犹如红睡莲,是指像那叫作红睡莲的大莲花,或者像盛开的莲花。巴利
Dukūlacumbaṭakenāti ganthitvā gahitadukūlavatthena, nāgavikkantacaraṇoti hatthināgasadisapadanikkhepo. Satapuññalakkhaṇoti anekasatapuññanimmitamahāpurisalakkhaṇo maṇiverocano yathāti ativiya virocamāno maṇi viya verocano nāma eko maṇivisesoti keci mahāsālovāti mahanto sālarukkho viya, koviḷārādimahārukkho viya vā padumo kokanado yathāti kokanadasaṅkhātaṃ mahāpadumaṃ viya, vikasamānapadumaṃ viya vā.
就像有人想把天河引下来一样,这类说法是为了在这段散说中说明:这件事对别人来说非常难做到,同时也是为了说明,对听闻的人来说,它能带来究竟的安乐。就像把地髓抽出来一样:好比用机械把大地底层的地髓膜翻上来抽出来。一由旬的量:就是一由旬那么长。蜂蜜团:就是蜂蜜结成的层块。巴利
Ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viyātiādi tassā pakiṇṇakakathāya aññesaṃ dukkarabhāvadassanañceva suṇantānaṃ accantasukhāvahabhāvadassanañca pathavījaṃ ākaḍḍhento viyāti nāḷiyantaṃ yojetvā mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatale pappaṭakojaṃ uddhaṃmukhaṃ katvā ākaḍḍhento viya yojanikanti yojanappamāṇaṃ madhubhaṇḍanti madhupaṭalaṃ.
“大”是指殊胜、广大。“一切布施都成了已施”:意思是,所有由因缘所生的资具都成了由住处施主所布施的。就像这样:有人走了两三个村子去乞食,什么都没得到就回来了,可一走进有树荫和水的园林,沐浴之后,在住处躺一会儿,起来坐下时,身体就像被注入了力量一样。又比如,在外游走的人,身体的色法被风和热折磨得疲惫;一进住处,关上门坐一会儿,不相顺的相续就平息了,相顺的相续就稳定下来,色法就像被重新注入了一样。再比如,在外游走时,脚被荆棘刺到,被树桩撞到,还会遇到蛇等危险和盗贼的威胁;可一进住处,关上门躺下,所有这些危险就都没有了。研习教法的人,会生起法喜之乐;修业处作意的人,因为没有了外在的散乱,会生起寂静之乐。还有,在外游走时,身上会出汗,眼睛会跳动;刚进住处的那一刹那,床、椅等还看不清楚,可坐一会儿之后,眼根的清净色就像被注入了一样,门窗、床椅等都看得清清楚楚了。而且,人们看到有人住在这个住处,就会以四种资具恭敬地供养侍奉。因此说:“住处布施被布施时,一切布施都成了已施。”关于“地居……”等等……“不可能”——这个意思应当用《大善见王的故事》等来阐明。巴利
Mahantanti uḷāraṃ. Sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotīti sabbameva paccayajātaṃ āvāsadāyakena dinnameva hoti. Tathāhi dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassapi chāyūdakasampannaṃ ārāmaṃ pavisitvā nhāyitvā paṭissaye muhuttaṃ nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇadhātu vātātapehi kilamati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nisinnassa visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati patiṭṭhāti, vaṇṇadhātu āharitvā pakkhittā viya hoti, bahi vicarantassa ca pāde kaṇṭako vijjhati, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayo ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nipannassa pana sabbe parissayā na honti, ajjhayantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhaṃ uppajjati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato, bahi vicarantassa ca kāye sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyanti, muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvāravātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti, etasmimpi ca āvāse vasantaṃ disvā manussā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvāsadānasmiṃ dinne sabbaṃ dānaṃ dinnameva hotī’’ti. Bhūmaṭṭhaka…pe… na sakkāti ayamattho mahāsudassanavatthunā (dī. ni. 2.241 ādayo) dīpetabbo.
“冷”:指因为内在界(四大)扰动,或者外在时节变化而生起的寒冷。“热”:指火的灼烧。此外应当知道,在森林大火等情况下也会产生热。“能遮止”:就是能挡住、能防护。它让以冷热为缘而生的身心逼恼不再发生。因为身体一旦被寒冷或炎热侵害,心念散乱的比丘就没法如理精勤修行。“诸猛兽”:指狮子、老虎等猛兽。进入有防护的住处,关上门坐下,这些危险就不会有。“诸爬行类”:指所有爬行移动、身体细长的众生。“蚊虫”:这是一种代表说法,应当知道苍蝇、虻虫等也都包括在内。“寒露”:指因寒冷时节以及连续七天降雨等情况下生起的寒冷触感。“诸雨”:指任何时候生起的降雨。这些都能被遮止——这就是此处文义的连接方式。巴利
Sītanti (sārattha. ṭī. cūḷavagga 3.295; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.4.243) ajjhattadhātukkhobhavasena vā bahiddhautuvipariṇāmavasena vā uppajjanakasītaṃ. Uṇhanti aggisantāpaṃ. Tassa pana davadāhādīsu sambhavo daṭṭhabbo. Paṭihantīti paṭibāhati. Yathā tadubhayavasena kāyacittānaṃ bādhanāni na honti, evaṃ karoti. Sītuṇhabbhāhate hi sarīre vikkhittacitto bhikkhu yoniso padahituṃ na sakkoti. Vāḷamigānīti sīhabyagghādivāḷamige. Guttasenāsanañhi pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa te parissayā na honti . Sarīsapeti ye keci sarantā gacchante dīghajātike. Makaseti nidassanametaṃ, ḍaṃsādīnaṃ eteneva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sisireti sītakālavasena sattāhavaddalikādivasena ca uppanne sisirasamphasse. Vuṭṭhiyoti yadā tadā uppannā vassavuṭṭhiyo paṭihanatīti yojanā.
狂风和烈日可怕:狂风能连根拔起树木、草丛等,夹带着尘土等,来势凶猛;而在夏季酷热的时候,烈日炙烤也很可怕。能被遮止:就是能被挡住、被排除。为了隐居:就是把心从各种所缘上收回来,安住于独处寂静。为了安乐:因为没有上面说的那些危险,住得安稳舒适。为了禅修:就是在三十八种所缘中,随选一种,让心专注深入。为了观察:就是从无常等角度,如实遍察一切有为法。巴利
Vātātapo ghoroti rukkhagacchādīnaṃ ummūlabhañjanavasena pavattiyā ghoro sarajaarajādibhedo vāto ceva gimhapariḷāhasamayesu uppattiyā ghoro sūriyātapo ca. Paṭihaññatīti paṭibāhīyati. Leṇatthanti nānārammaṇato cittaṃ nivattetvā paṭisallānārāmatthaṃ. Sukhatthanti vuttaparissayābhāvena phāsuvihāratthaṃ. Jhāyitunti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu yattha katthaci cittaṃ upanijjhāyituṃ. Vipassitunti aniccādito sabbasaṅkhāre sammasituṃ.
在精舍,即在住处。让他建造,就是使人建造。令人愉悦,就是让人内心欢喜、居住安乐。应当把多闻者安置在这里,就是说,建好之后,应当在这些精舍里安置那些多闻、持戒、具足善法的人。安置他们时,为了让这些多闻者不因资具而疲惫,应当以正直、意乐具足、对业果和三宝功德深具信心与清净之心,布施食物、饮料、衣服和坐卧处。巴利
Vihāreti paṭissaye. Kārayeti kārāpeyya. Rammeti manorame nivāsasukhe. Vāsayettha bahussuteti kāretvā pana ettha vihāresu bahussute sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme nivāseyya. Te nivāsento pana tesaṃ bahussutānaṃ yathā paccayehi kilamatho na hoti, evaṃ annañca pānañca vatthasenāsanāni ca dadeyya ujubhūtesu ajjhāsayasampannesu kammaphalānaṃ ratanattayaguṇānañca saddahanena vippasannena cetasā.
现在,为了说明在家众和出家众互相帮助的道理,说了“他们对她”这首偈颂。其中,“他们”指多闻的比丘们;“她”指那位男近事男。开示法:就是开示能消除整个轮回之苦的法。他在这里了知了那个法之后:这个人在这教法里,通过正确修行而了知正法,凭借证得最高之道而成为无漏者,最终般涅槃。巴利
Idāni gahaṭṭhapabbajitānaṃ aññamaññūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘te tassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha teti bahussutā tassāti upāsakassa. Dhammaṃ desentīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhapanudanaṃ dhammaṃ desenti. Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti so puggalo yaṃ saddhammaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sammāpaṭipajjanena jānitvā aggamaggādhigamena anāsavo hutvā parinibbāyati.
光是靠恭敬与供养,初夜就过去了;世尊说法几乎占满了中夜,中夜所剩无几。所以经文里说“bahudeva ratti”(夜已过多时),注疏解释说“atirekataraṃ diyaḍḍhayāmaṃ”(超过了一个半更)。“示知”(sandassesī):就是显示利益——听了关于布施住处的如法开示之后,世尊接着开示:“大王,这就是戒,这就是定,这就是慧”,这样让他们正确看清戒等功德,就像用手牵着一样,让他们当面清楚地看到。“劝导”(samādapesī):就是引导他们受持这些戒等功德,让他们这样把握:“应当这样持戒,安立在戒上之后,应当这样修定,应当这样修慧”,使他们照着去受持。“策励”(samuttejesī):就是通过让他们仔细听,使他们的心变得明净,让已经受持的戒变得非常清净,正在修习的止与观也被很好地净化,能带来更高的殊胜成就,这样来策励他们的心。“令喜悦”(sampahaṃsesī):就是对于依照教导而安住于戒等功德的人,以现前已经得到的功德利益,以及将来会得到的殊胜果报,正确地令他们的心振奋欢喜,让他们因为获得安稳而感到十分满足。这些词的含义应当这样来理解。巴利
Pūjāsakkāravaseneva paṭhamayāmo khepito, bhagavato desanāya appāvaseso majjhimayāmo gatoti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bahudeva ratti’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘atirekataraṃ diyaḍḍhayāma’’nti. Sandassesīti ānisaṃsaṃ dassesi, āvāsadānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ sutvā tato paraṃ, ‘‘mahārāja, itipi sīlaṃ, itipi samādhi, itipi paññā’’ti sīlādiguṇe tesaṃ sammā dassesi, hatthena gahetvā viya paccakkhato pakāsesi. Samādapesīti ‘‘evaṃ sīlaṃ samādātabbaṃ, sīle patiṭṭhitena evaṃ samādhi, evaṃ paññā bhāvetabbā’’ti yathā te sīlādiguṇe ādiyanti, tathā gaṇhāpesi. Samuttejesīti yathā samādinnaṃ sīlaṃ suvisuddhaṃ hoti, samathavipassanā ca bhāviyamānā yathā suṭṭhu visodhitā uparivisesāvahā honti, evaṃ cittaṃ samuttejesi nisāmanavasena vodāpesi. Sampahaṃsesīti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ ṭhitasīlādiguṇehi sampati laddhaguṇānisaṃsehi ceva upari laddhabbaphalavisesehi ca uparicittaṃ sammā pahaṃsesi, laddhassāsavasena suṭṭhu tosesi. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo.
“八十位大长老”这个说法虽然是集合名词,但也可以用来指其中的一部分,所以注疏里说“在八十位大长老还在世的时候”。因为阿难长老也包括在里面。“在释迦族众中”,就是指在释迦王族的群体里。巴利
Samudāyavacanopi asītimahāthera-saddo tadekadesepi niruḷhoti āha ‘‘asītimahātheresu vijjamānesū’’ti. Ānandattheropi hi antogadho evāti. Sākiyamaṇḍaleti sākiyarājasamūhe.
因为与行道相应,所以叫“行道者”。因此注疏说:“已行道者。”有学因为具备应当修学的戒等素质,所以叫“有学”;因为已经部分止息了恶行,所以叫“沙门”。有学的行道者,是以行道的个人为立足点,在开示行道时,是通过道来界定这个人,所以说“以道来界定并显示个人”。有学之道是教法中的吉祥之道,它正确地避开不应亲近的、采取应亲近的,并在殊胜之处修习,因此能带来无学法圆满,所以是不断增长的道。“不疲劳地就能了知”这句话,是因为当时他们还不适合证得无学地才说的。而“不疲劳地”这个说法,也表明即使是已证得无碍解的人,要让他了知尚未证得的道,也是沉重的。“Osaṭā”的意思是进入。全部律藏都已说明,因为它以众多戒论为主;其余二藏也同样如此。“以三藏”中的“以”是表示工具格,由此显示各藏对各自修学具有最能成就的作用。巴利
Paṭipadāya niyuttattā pāṭipado. Tenāha – ‘‘paṭipannako’’ti. Sikkhanasīlatādinā sekho, odhiso samitapāpatāya samaṇo. Sekho pāṭipado paṭipajjanapuggalādhiṭṭhānena paṭipadādesanaṃ niyamento paṭipadāya puggalaṃ niyameti nāmāti ‘‘paṭipadāya puggalaṃ niyametvā dassetī’’ti. Sekhappaṭipadā sāsane maṅgalapaṭipadā sammadeva asevitabbaparivajjanena sevitabbasamādānena ukkaṃsavatthūsu ca bhāvato asekhadhammapāripūriyā āvahattā ca vaḍḍhamānakapaṭipadā. Akilamantāva sallakkhessantīti idaṃ tadā tesaṃ asekhabhūmiadhigamāya ayogyatāya vuttaṃ. Akilamantāvāti iminā paṭisambhidāppattassapi anadhigatamaggasaññāpanā bhāriyāti dasseti. Osaṭāti anuppaviṭṭhā. Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ kathitameva hoti tassa sīlakathābāhullato sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Tīhi piṭakehīti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tena taṃtaṃpiṭakānaṃ tassā tassā sikkhāya sādhakatamabhāvaṃ dasseti.
背部风痛会生起,是因为已执取的身体本来就是这种性质,也因为诸行无常、总是伴随着苦。或者说,这(背痛)是没有原因的——针对说这话的用意,才说了“有能力”等语。佛陀是依照释迦族诸王的心意,才想以四种威仪来使用身体。正因如此,后面会说:“导师也正是针对这一点,在那里铺了桑喀帝而躺下。”如果是这样,那“我的背痛”这句话又怎么说呢?于是解释说:“因为已执取的身体就是所谓的……”等等。巴利
Piṭṭhivātouppajjati upādinnakasarīrassa tathārūpattā saṅkhārānañca aniccatāya dukkhānubandhattā. Akāraṇaṃ vā etanti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘pahotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuñjitukāmo ahosi sakyarājūnaṃ ajjhāsayavasena. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘satthāpi tadeva sandhāya tattha saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā nipajjītī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyatī’’ti idaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘upādinnakasarīrañca nāmā’’tiādi.
23 在“以此巴帝摩卡防护……具足”这类句子中,sampanna(具足)这个词的意思是“具备”,但在这里是为了显示“圆满”的意思,才说“意思是戒圆满”。凡是戒具足的人,就是戒圆满。因为只有清净的戒才被称为“圆满”,而不是有污点或杂色的戒。“以善法”:就是以美好的法,因为那些法在相续中生起时,会使那个相续变得美好;又因为那些法能成就善士的品格,所以是善士们所具有的法。巴利
23. ‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena…pe… sampanno’’tiādīsu (vibha. 511) samannāgatattho sampanna-saddo, idha pana pāripūriatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇasīloti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo pana sampannasīloyeva, so paripuṇṇasīlo. Parisuddhañhi sīlaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇa’’nti vuccati, na sabalaṃ kammāsaṃ vā. Sundaradhammehīti sobhanadhammehi. Yasmiṃ santāne uppannā tassa sobhanabhāvato. Tehi sappurisabhāvasādhanato sappurisānaṃ dhammehi.
24 以“依此(范围)”一句,是指从“在此,玛哈那玛,圣弟子”开始,直到“容易获得”一词,以这略说文句安立纲目。按次第,即按略说的次第。这样说,即是以现在所说的“玛哈那玛,如何……”等方式而说。巴利
24.Imināettakena ṭhānenāti ‘‘idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako’’ti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘akasiralābhī’’ti padaṃ iminā ettakena uddesapadena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā. Paṭipāṭiyāti uddesapaṭipāṭiyā. Evamāhāti ‘‘evaṃ kathañca, mahānāmā’’tiādinā idāni vuccamānena dassitākārena āha.
25 “惭”就是感到羞耻、感到难受。因为惭的特相是厌恶恶行,所以说“意思是厌恶”。“愧”就是感到恐惧。因为愧的特相是害怕恶行。“已策励精进者”就是没有陷入退缩的精进者,因此说“心无退缩”。“为了断除”就是为了彻底断除。所谓诸善法的“具足”,其实就是证得,所以说“为了获得”。“以念与善巧”就是以念的善巧,也就是锐利、清晰、勇健的状态。不过在注疏里,善巧是指慧,所以依“以念和善巧的状态”这个用意来解释其含义;若这样理解,就成了另外被指出的一个法。而“具念者”这个词,正是以这个差别摄取了念;后面说“即使久作、久说也能忆持、随念”,只是说明了念的作用,不是慧的作用,因此“以念与善巧”可以理解为“以念的善巧状态”。正因为如此,念由于缘的差别而具有强大有力、不依赖其他法的状态。同样地,即使与智不相应的心也能生起读诵与观照。巴利
25.Hirīyatīti lajjīyati pīḷīyati. Yasmā hirī pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇā, tasmā ‘‘jigucchatīti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Ottappatīti uttappati. Pāputrāsalakkhaṇañhi ottappaṃ. Paggahitavīriyoti saṅkocaṃ anāpannavīriyo. Tenāha ‘‘anosakkitamānaso’’ti. Pahānatthāyāti samucchindanatthāya. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadā nāma adhigamo evāti āha ‘‘paṭilābhatthāyā’’ti. Satinepakkenāti satiyā nepakkena tikkhavisadasūrabhāvena. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana nepakkaṃ nāma paññāti adhippāyena ‘‘satiyā ca nipakabhāvena cā’’ti attho vutto, evaṃ sati añño niddiṭṭho nāma hoti. Satimāti ca imināva visesā sati gahitā, parato ‘‘cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā’’ti satikiccameva niddiṭṭhaṃ, na paññākiccaṃ, tasmā satinepakkenāti satiyā nepakkabhāvenāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Teneva hi paccayavisesavasena aññadhammanirapekkho satiyā balavabhāvo. Tathā hi ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi ajjhayanasammasanāni sambhavanti.
“塔院义务等”这里,用“等”这个字涵盖了菩提树院义务等。所谓“圆满八十种大义务的行持”,在这里“义务行持圆满”这个词要分别搭配,即“八十种义务的行持圆满”和“大义务的行持圆满”。其中,大义务是指《犍度》中所说的十四种:客比丘义务、常住比丘义务、出行比丘义务、随喜义务、食堂义务、乞食义务、阿兰若义务、住处义务、浴室义务、厕所义务、亲教师义务、共住弟子义务、老师义务、弟子义务。除此之外,还有在某些时候,比如被作呵责甘马等的时候、处于别住等状态的时候应当行持的八十种小义务,这些并非在任何情况下都应行持,所以没有归入大义务之中。其中,从“我要为别住比丘们制定义务”开始,到“不得授具足戒……不得在地上经行处经行”等,这些是别住比丘在平时应行持的义务,到此为止共六十六种。此后,从“诸比丘,别住比丘不得与别住年长比丘、应被退回根本者、应受敬悦者、行敬悦者、应被出罪者一起,在同一有覆盖的住处共住”等开始,这些是在不同于普通比丘的情况下,针对别住年长者等不同个人而应行持的,所以按这些人各自归纳,每人算一种,共五种,合计七十一种义务。在受举罪甘马者的义务中,根据制定义务的方式所说的——“不得接受普通比丘的礼敬、起迎……不得在洗澡时让人擦背”——这“不接受礼敬等”算一种;再加上“普通比丘不得以戒行过失来指责他”等十种,这样一共是八十二种。不过,这其中有些是呵责甘马等的义务,有些是别住等的义务,由于没有把未归入大义务的部分单独拿出来计算,所以是八十二种。这样一来,略少或略多都不至于影响计算,因此这里就说“八十”。而在注疏的其他地方,则说“八十二种犍度义务”。巴利
Cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīti ādi-saddena bodhiyaṅgaṇavattādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Asītimahāvattapaṭipattipūraṇanti ettha asītivattapaṭipattipūraṇaṃ mahāvattapaṭipattipūraṇanti vattapaṭipattipūraṇa-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha mahāvattāni (vibha. mūlaṭī. 406) nāma vattakhandhake (cūḷava. 356 ādayo) vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikaṃ gamikaṃ anumodanaṃ bhattaggaṃ piṇḍacārikaṃ āraññikaṃ senāsanaṃ jantāgharaṃ vaccakuṭi upajjhāyaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ ācariyaṃ antevāsikavattanti cuddasa. Tato aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāle pārivāsikādikāle ca caritabbāni asīti khuddakavattāni sabbāsu avatthāsu na caritabbāni, tasmā mahāvattesu, aggahitāni. Tattha ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 81) vuttāni pakabhatte caritabbavattāvasānāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena mānattārahena mānattacārikena abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vattabba’’ntiādīni (cūḷava. 82) pakatatte caritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ visuṃ agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitabbāni pañcāti ekasattativattāni, ukkhepaniyakammakatavattesu vattapaññāpanavasena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ…pe… nhāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 51) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsitabbo’’tiādīni ca dasāti evametāni dvāsīti. Etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāni kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti, evaṃ appakaṃ pana ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanupagaṃ na hotīti idha ‘‘asīti’’cceva vuttaṃ. Aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese ‘‘dvāsīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vuccati.
恭敬地学习与恭敬地教人学习,这里的“恭敬”一词应分别与两者搭配。学习就是领受教诫。诵法就是诵出法。说法——巴利
Sakkaccaṃuddisanaṃ sakkaccaṃ uddisāpananti paccekaṃ sakkaccaṃ-saddo yojetabbo. Uddisanaṃ uddesaggahaṇaṃ. Dhammosāraṇaṃ dhammassa uccāraṇaṃ. Dhammadesanā –
“ 开头应当讲戒,中间讲禅那和观;
到了结尾,则说涅槃,这就是说法者立说的准则。”巴利
‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ deseyya, majjhe jhānaṃ vipassanaṃ; Pariyosāne ca nibbānaṃ, esā kathikasaṇṭhitī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.246) –
具备如此所说特征的法谈。对于前来坐下闻法的任何在家众或出家众,在那一刻应机而说的如法开示,就是“近坐谈”。餐后的随喜开示,就是应当随喜的。“忆持者”在这里,并不只是指忆念很久以前做过、很久以前说过的事;之所以说“关于那以身久作的……”等语,是为了显示:以把握如此生起的色法与非色法为门,进入观行之道,由此建立起念觉支。“即使一次随念”,就是只随念一次。“一再随念”,就是反复随念。应当知道,当念觉支也转为依远离、依离贪、依灭、导向舍之后,这样随念的人,在那些速行刹那中,就以随念速行、小速行的方式而被称为“随念者”。巴利
Evaṃ kathitalakkhaṇā dhammakathā. Upagantvā nisinnassa yassa kassaci gahaṭṭhassa pabbajitassa vā taṅkhaṇānurūpā dhammī kathā upanisinnakathā. Bhattānumodanakathā anumodaniyā. Saritāti ettha na kevalaṃ cirakatacirabhāsitānaṃ saraṇamanussaraṇamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho tathāpavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ pariggahamukhena pavattavipassanācāre satisambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpananti dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmiṃ kāyena cirakate’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sakimpi saraṇenāti ekavāraṃ saraṇena. Punappunaṃ saraṇenāti anu anu saraṇena. Satisambojjhaṅgampi vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vosaggapariṇāmiñca katvā saranto tattha tattha javanavāre saraṇajavanavāre parittajavanavasena anussaritāti veditabbā.
“界”这个词有“通达”的意思,也有“智慧”的意思,所以注释说:“能够通达生与灭的智慧。”这个开示是依照综合的方式来宣说的,所以说:“依镇伏的方式和依断除的方式。”因此说“以及以观慧……”等。就观慧而言,是从它具有决择作用的角度来说的。而那种观慧只是局部的,为了把它显示为无余的,所以说:“以及从它能导向获得道慧的角度来说。”即使在谈到趋向苦灭之道的性质时,也是同样的道理。“正”,就是如实。因为道慧的本质是不可动摇的,它已经完成了应当断除的,就不再有任何残余的作用,这种依方法、依理则而生起的活动,本身就是如此,所以说:“依因、依理。”巴利
Gatiatthā dhātusaddā buddhiatthā hontīti āha – ‘‘udayañca vayañca paṭivijjhituṃ samatthāyā’’ti. Missakanayenāyaṃ desanā āgatāti āha – ‘‘vikkhambhanavasena ca samucchedavasena cā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpaññāya cevā’’tiādi. Vipassanāpaññāya nibbedhikapariyāyato. Sā ca kho padesikāti nippadesikaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘maggapaññāya paṭilābhasaṃvattanato cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhakkhayagāminibhāvepi eseva nayo. Sammāti yāthāvato. Akuppadhammatāya hi maggapaññā khepitakhepanāya na puna kiccaṃ atthīti upāyena ñāyena yā pavatti sā evāti āha – ‘‘hetunā nayenā’’ti.
26 增上心就是殊胜心,指广大心。而它的增上性,是通过远离欲贪等对立障碍而达到更殊胜的状态;依止于这些心的心所法,就是增上心所。因此注释说:“增上心即最殊胜的心,以及依止它的心所。”现法安乐住,是指在今生这个身体中安住于安稳快乐。而且,在具足这些禅那的当下,他能获得并体验到远离所生的喜乐、定所生的喜乐、无喜之乐,以及舍念清净的智慧之乐,所以说“在入定与住定的刹那,成为获得快乐的因”。在想要的任何时刻都能入定,这句话说明他对这些禅那已获得了入定自在;而从“易得者”这个说法,应当知道也一并说明了转向自在、决意自在和出定观察自在。称为无苦而得者,是显示这些禅那具有乐行道和速通达的特点;称为广大而得者,是显示这些禅那的熟练,以及由定量所显现的状态。因此说“由于熟练的缘故”等。“能够入定”,是因为已经通过入定自在而成就了。定障法,是指与自在相反的法。而对于禅那的证得来说,那些相反的法早已被镇伏了,否则根本不可能证得禅那。不能毫不费力地镇伏,就是说要费力地镇伏、净化;这里应理解为:通过观察欲贪的过患等,将欲贪等其他定障远远驱除,这就是镇伏和净化。巴利
26. Adhikaṃ ceto abhiceto, mahaggatacittaṃ, tassa pana adhikatā kāmacchandādipaṭipakkhavigamena visiṭṭhabhāvappatti, tannissitāni ābhicetasikāni. Tenāha ‘‘abhicittaṃ seṭṭhacittaṃ sitāna’’nti. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve phāsuvihārabhūtānaṃ. Tehi pana samaṅgitakkhaṇe yasmā vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ apītijaṃ satipārisuddhiñāṇasukhañca paṭilabhati vindati, tasmā āha – ‘‘appitappitakkhaṇe sukhapaṭilābhahetūna’’nti. Icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjitāti iminā tesu jhānesu samāpajjanavasībhāvamāha, ‘‘nikāmalābhī’’ti pana vacanato āvajjanādhiṭṭhānā paccavekkhaṇavasiyo ca vuttā evāti veditabbā. Nidukkhalābhīti iminā tesaṃ jhānānaṃ sukhapaṭipadākhippābhiññataṃ dasseti, vipulalābhīti iminā paguṇataṃ tappamāṇadassitabhāvadīpanato. Tenāha ‘‘paguṇabhāvenā’’tiādi. Samāpajjituṃ sakkoti samāpajjanavasībhāvatāya sādhitattā. Samādhipāripanthikadhammeti vasībhāvassa paccanīkadhamme. Jhānādhigamassa pana paccanīkadhammā pageva vikkhambhitā, aññathā jhānādhigamo eva na siyā. Akilamanto vikkhambhetuṃ na sakkotīti kicchena vikkhambheti visodheti, kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandādīnaṃ aññesaṃ samādhipāripanthikānaṃ dūrasamussāraṇaṃ idha vikkhambhanaṃ visodhananti veditabbaṃ.
27 为了观慧的利益,因为能带来一层比一层更殊胜的成果,所以不断增长的预备阶段修行,也就是从戒等开始的前分行道。这前分行道因为已经修习成熟,必定会含摄将来必然生起的殊胜成就,所以像蛋一样,称为蛋;又因为没有被烦恼染污,所以是不腐坏的蛋,因此叫不腐蛋。能策发观慧并安住其中的人,他的状态就是不腐蛋性。为了观智等的种类,就是指宿住智等智慧的种种差别。在那里,也就是在《心荒芜经》中说到,诸比丘,这样具足十五种精进支的比丘,有能力趋向彻底的厌离,因此是具足十五种精进支的意思。这样,凡是经中出现的譬喻配合,应当把这个譬喻配合放到这部《有学经》里来理解,这就是上下文的关联。巴利
27. Vipassanāhitāya uparūparivisesāvahattā vaḍḍhamānāya pubbabhāgasīlādipaṭipadāya. Sā eva pubbabhāgapaṭipadā yathābhāvitatāya avassaṃ bhāvinaṃ visesaṃ pariggahitattā aṇḍaṃ viyāti aṇḍaṃ, kilesehi adūsitatāya apūti aṇḍaṃ etassāti apuccaṇḍo, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ṭhitapuggalo, tassa bhāvo apuccaṇḍatā. Vipassanādiñāṇappabhedāyāti pubbenivāsañāṇādiñāṇapabhedāya. Tatthāti cetokhilasutte (ma. ni. 1.185) ‘‘sa kho so, bhikkhave, evaṃ ussoḷhipannarasaṅgasamannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo abhinibbidāyā’’ti āgatattā ussoḷhipannarasehi aṅgehi samannāgatabhāvoti evaṃ yaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ āgataṃ, taṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ idha imasmiṃ sekhasutte yojetvā veditabbanti sambandho.
28 28. 因为具有广大等状态,即使随顺于下地诸禅那,它们也以自己的殊胜超越、越过了下地诸禅那而安住,所以称为“无上”。因此注疏说:“与初禅等不相似,是最上的。”在第二禅等以及其余诸通达中也是如此。宿住智生起时,就像破除遮蔽自己境域的烦恼黑暗一样生起;同样,它也是在自境域中造成某种殊胜而生起。所以说:“首先以宿住智生起。”其余两种智也是同样的道理。巴利
28. Mahaggatādibhāvena heṭṭhimānaṃ jhānānaṃ anurūpampi attano visesena te uttaritvā atikkamitvāna ṭhitanti anuttaraṃ, tenāha – ‘‘paṭhamādijjhānehi asadisaṃ uttama’’nti. Dutiyādīsupi abhinibbhidāsu. Pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ yathā attano visayapaṭicchādakaṃ kilesandhakāraṃ vidhamantameva uppajjati, evaṃ attano visaye kañci visesaṃ karontameva uppajjatīti āha – ‘‘pubbenivāsañāṇena paṭhamaṃ jāyatī’’ti, sesañāṇadvayepi eseva nayo.
29 在“行”这个词上,用的是表示“关于自己”的处格,所以注释说“所谓行,其意思就是存在”。至于“以此”,用的是具格,表示原因,因为那些明与行在前往未曾到过的方向时,正是成就此事的最重要因素。巴利
29.Caraṇasminti paccatte bhummavacananti āha ‘‘caraṇaṃ nāma hotīti attho’’ti. Tenāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ agatapubbadisāgamane tesaṃ sādhakatamabhāvato.
“八智”:这是把本经中已提到的智,以及《安巴塔经》等经里提到而此处未提到的智,一并收入而说的。“穿透”是指打破并摧毁遮蔽宿住随念的烦恼黑暗等。巴利
Aṭṭha ñāṇānīti idha āgatāni ca anāgatāni ca ambaṭṭhasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.254 ādayo) āgatāni gahetvā vadati. Vinivijjhitvāti pubbenivāsapaṭicchādakādikilesatamaṃ bhinditvā padāletvā.
30 Sanaṅkumārena 就是“常童子”的意思。为了说明他确实具有常童子的特质,所以经文说“从很久很久以前开始”。所谓“那个自体”,是指他当年还在人间时,靠那个身体修成禅那,那个身体就是童子之身;因此,即使后来成了梵天,他仍然以那样的童子之身来行事。巴利
30.Sanaṅkumārenāti sanantanakumārena. Tadeva hi tassa sanantanakumārataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cirakālato paṭṭhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. So attabhāvoti yena attabhāvena manussapathe jhānaṃ nibbattesi, so kumārattabhāvo, tasmā brahmabhūtopi tādisena kumārattabhāvena carati.
“janitasmiṃ”这个音,是把 i 变成 e,才说成“janetasmiṃ”;而“janitasmiṃ”的意思应当理解为“janasmiṃ”(在人群中)。虽然“janitasmiṃ”是通称,但这里指的是有四种姓称呼的人间。为了说明“刹帝利最胜”只是世间的称呼,只限于人界,不适用于天界或梵天界,所以说了“那些依止氏族的人”。“依止”的意思是:各自随念或称说自己的氏族,比如“我是乔达摩”“我是迦叶”。巴利
Janitasmiṃ-saddo eva i-kārassa e-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘janetasmi’’nti vutto, janitasminti ca janasminti attho veditabbo. Janitasminti sāmaññaggahaṇepi yattha catuvaṇṇasamaññā, tattheva manussaloke. Khattiyo seṭṭhoti lokasamaññāpi manussalokeyeva, na devakāye brahmakāye vāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye gottapaṭisārino’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭisarantīti ‘‘ahaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ kassapo’’ti pati pati attano gottaṃ anusaranti paṭijānanti vāti attho.
到此为止指的是以那句“萨度,萨度,阿难!”所表达的赞叹认可。从“胜者所说名为生起……”开始,一直到结尾,长老所说的话,也就成了佛陀所说的话。如果有人提出这样的质疑:“这部经是因为随顺世尊的教导才成为胜者所说,还是仅仅因为赞叹认可才成为胜者所说?”这种质疑在这里没有余地,因为长老的教导是以随顺世尊的教导为原因的,同时也因为有世尊的赞叹认可。至于这里在意义上没有详细展开的地方,那是很容易理解的。巴利
Ettāvatāti ‘‘sādhu sādhu ānandā’’ti ettakena sādhukāradānena. Jinabhāsitaṃ nāma jātantiādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā therabhāsitaṃ buddhabhāsitameva nāma jātaṃ. ‘‘Kimpanidaṃ suttaṃ satthudesanānuvidhānato jinabhāsitaṃ, udāhu sādhukāradānamattenā’’ti evarūpā codanā idha anokāsā therassa desanāya bhagavato desanānuvidhānahetukattā sādhukāradānassāti. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《波德离亚经》的注释巴利
4. Potaliyasuttavaṇṇanā
31 31. “鸯伽”是地方上的王子们的称呼,他们居住的地方,按照习惯用法,也叫“鸯伽”,所以说“那个地方就是鸯伽”。至于“摩醯河以北的水”,是指摩醯河的水在那个地区的北边。因为离那些水不远,那个地区就叫“北水”。而摩醯河有些地方决口改道了,所以说“哪条摩醯河的北边之水”。这里,从那条摩醯河的源头开始,就是这段解释性说明的起点。因为(《增支部》复注 3.8.19)世间人对赡部洲、雪山以及那里形成的海、湖、山、河等等之中,凡是人们到不了的地方,那些自己迷惑的人还要去迷惑别人,为了在这些地方破除迷惑,就开始说“这就是赡部洲”等等。意思是它的长和宽各有一万由旬。所以说“在那里”等等。那里被水淹没,是因为享用这片土地的有情们福报耗尽了。巴利
31. Aṅgā nāma janapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhivasena aṅgātveva vuccatīti āha ‘‘aṅgāyeva so janapado’’ti. Mahiyā panassa uttarena yā āpoti mahiyā nadiyā yā āpo tassa janapadassa uttarena honti. Tāsaṃ avidūrattā so janapado uttarāpoti vuccati. Sā pana mahī katthaci katthaci bhijjitvā gatāti āha ‘‘kataramahiyā uttarena yā āpo’’ti. Tatthāti tassā mahiyā āgamanato paṭṭhāya ayaṃ āvibhāvakathā. Yasmā (a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.19) lokiyā jambudīpo himavā tattha patiṭṭhitasamuddadahapabbatanadiyoti etesu yaṃ yaṃ na manussagocaraṃ, tattha sayaṃ sammūḷhā aññepi sammohayanti, tattha tattha sammohavidhamanatthaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kira jambudīpo’’tiādimāraddhaṃ. Dasasahassayojanaparimāṇo āyāmato ca vitthārato cāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Udakena ajjhotthaṭo tadupabhogisattānaṃ puññakkhayena.
善见峰就是善见山,世间人把它叫做金峰。根香是指黑沉香之类的香。心材香是指旃檀之类的香。肤材香是指马尾松之类的香。树皮香是指丁香之类的香。薄皮香是指木苹果之类的香。树脂香是指娑阇树脂之类的香。叶香是指多摩罗叶和香根草叶之类的香。花香是指龙华和藏红花之类的香。果香是指肉豆蔻之类的香。香之香就是一切香气的气味。因为有一棵树的根等所有部分都有香气,这里就把它称为香。这种香的气味就是香之香。据说,这些横向宽都有五十由旬,纵向长则大约有二百由旬。巴利
Sundaradassanaṃ kūṭanti sudassanakūṭaṃ, yaṃ loke ‘‘hemakūṭa’’nti vuccati. Mūlagandho kāḷānusāriyādi. Sāragandho candanādi. Pheggugandho salalādi. Tacagandho lavaṅgādi. Papaṭikagandho kabitthādi. Rasagandho sajjādi, pattagandho tamālahiriverādi. Pupphagandho nāgakuṅkumādi. Phalagandho jātiphalādi. Gandhagandho sabbesaṃ gandhānaṃ gandho. Yassa hi rukkhassa sabbesampi mūlādīnaṃ gandho atthi, so idha gandho nāma. Tassa gandhassa gandho gandhagandho. Sabbāni puthulato paññāsayojanāni, āyāmato pana ubbedhato viya dviyojanasatānevāti vadanti.
悦意的石板地面:指为了方便走下去而铺设的、令人欢喜的台阶石板。善加铺设:由于享用这些的众生共同的业力感召,它们被铺设得很好、运转顺畅。鱼和鳖等会让水变浑浊,因为这里没有这些,所以水像水晶一样清澈无浊。横向绵延、高耸突出的山峰,就叫做畜生山。巴利
Manoharasilātalānīti otaraṇatthāya manuññasopānasilātalāni. Supaṭiyattānīti tadupabhogisattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammānubhāvena suṭṭhu paṭiyattāni suppavattitāni honti. Macchakacchapādayo udakaṃ malinaṃ karonti, tadabhāvato phalikasadisanimmaludakāni. Tiriyato dīghaṃ uggatakūṭanti ‘‘tiracchānapabbata’’nti āha.
店铺本身就是交易活动的门面,所以经文说“千个店铺门面”。已经区分开的,就是已经确定下来、彼此不混杂的。居住的地方,就是自己觉得舒适、适合居住的地方。在那里坐,所以叫“座”,也就是应当坐的地方。巴利
Āpaṇāni eva vohārassa mukhabhūtānīti āha ‘‘āpaṇamukhasahassānī’’ti. Vibhattānīti vavatthitāni aññamaññāsambhinnāni. Vasanaṭṭhānanti attano yathāphāsukaṃ vasitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsati etthāti āsanaṃ, nisīditabbaṭṭhānāni.
由于遮蔽了依不适宜而生起者,所以是被遮蔽者的相合;那正好与内心意乐的成就相合,它彰显了这一点,因此叫“相合”。所以他说“不相合”。所谓“因的同义词”,就是能让人了知的因的同义词。这里说的因,指的就是能让人了知的因。能令意义显现出来,就叫“相”;能令那隐没、隐藏的意义被通达,就叫“特征”;依它而被量度,所以称为“征”。现在为了阐明这个意义,他说“长十指等……被称为征、相”。“那些”指的是相等等。教导者即教导、训诫。呵责者即叱责。巴利
Asāruppaṃ paṭicca uppajjanakassa chādanato channaṃ anucchavikaṃ, tadeva ajjhāsayasampattiṃ patirūpeti pakāsetīti patirūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nappatirūpa’’nti. Kāraṇavevacanānīti ñāpakakāraṇavevacanāni. Ñāpakañhi kāraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Atthaṃ ākaroti pakāsetīti ākāro, tameva līnaṃ guḷhaṃ atthaṃ gametīti liṅgaṃ, so tena nimīyatīti nimittanti vuccati. Idāni tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘dīghadasavattha…pe… nimittāti vuttā’’ti āha. Teti ākārādayo. Tathā hi pana metiādinā potaliyo gahapati ‘‘paribbājakaniyāmena ahaṃ jīvāmi, tasmā gahapati na homīti vadati. Ovadantoti anusāsanto. Upavadantoti paribhāsanto.
32 贪之所以被称为贪,是因为它有执取的本性。没有执取相状的就不是贪。与讥嫌相对立、对他人不触恼,就是非讥嫌性的触恼。讥嫌性的触恼,是指以讥嫌的方式触恼、辱骂他人。买卖的交易,是指具有买卖特征、带有经商性质的给予和接受。用“给提萨”等称呼来表达,就是施设层面的交易。按照所想表达的含义去称呼、言说、使人了知,就是言语层面的交易。通过它来交易真实或不真实,就是思。这里所指的就是这种以思为特征的交易,而且它确实是有罪过的,因为它是所希求的完全断除。现在为了显示四种交易在此处的生起,说了“yasmā vā”等语。在家人,是指没有思;即“我是在家人”这样的思的活动不存在。在家人之言,是指没有言语;即“在家人”这样的对自己和他人的言语活动不存在。在家人之施设,是指没有名称;即“在家人”这样的称呼不存在。在家人之交易,是指没有行为;即没有(这样的)活动。巴利
32.Gedhabhūto lobhoti gijjhanasabhāvo lobho. Agijjhanalakkhaṇo na lobho, anindābhūtaṃ aghaṭṭananti nindāya paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ paresaṃ aghaṭṭanaṃ. Nindāghaṭṭanāti nindāvasena paresaṃ ghaṭṭanā akkosanā. Byavahāravohāropīti kayavikkayalakkhaṇo sabyohāropi dānaggahaṇaṃ vohāro. ‘‘Datto tisso’’ tiādinā voharaṇaṃ paññāpananti paññatti vohāro. Yathādhippetassa atthassa voharaṇaṃ kathanaṃ bodhananti vacanaṃ vohāro. Yāthāvato ayāthāvato ca voharati etenāti vohāro, cetanā. Ayamidhādhippetoti ayaṃ cetanālakkhaṇo vohāro idha imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto, so ca kho sāvajjova samucchedassa icchitattā. Idāni catubbidhassapi vohārassa idha sambhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gihīti cetanā natthīti ahaṃ gihīti cetanāpavatti natthi. Gihīti vacanaṃ natthīti gihīti attano paresañca vacanappavatti natthi. Gihīti paṇṇatti natthīti gihīti samaññā natthi. Gihīti byavahāro natthīti samudācāro natthi.
33 杀生本身就是一种结缚。为什么?因为它以束缚的方式生起,不给人脱离的机会。由于杀生存在,那个人才被称为“杀生者”,所以经文说“因为杀生……存在……是”。凡是某人具有某种东西,他就依此而被标示出来。“由于多类”:是依无眼者等差别而分为多种。杀生的对立面是离杀生。而从义理上说,离杀生属于身门的律仪,所以说“以身律仪”。“我也会谴责自己”等语,是对杀生显示过患。见到过患的人,就会从杀生中停下来。“依说法方式”:在其他经典和阿毗达摩中,于十结、五盖里,依说法的方式,虽然别处并未包含,也把它说为结或盖。为什么?因为那层意义在这里是存在的。因此说“以轮回束缚之义,以及以遮蔽利益之义”,因为杀生生起时,确实遮蔽了以离杀生为缘的利益。“一无明漏”:这是依俱生缘说的。但依亲依止缘,应知其他诸漏也有如理生起的可能。因为杀生者这样期望欲乐:“我要造作以此为缘的利益。”他执取邪见,期待某种殊胜的存在。在那里,损害并逼迫已生起者,就是“损害”,即是苦;以生起无益的方式而逼恼,就是“烧灼”,这是它们之间的差别。“于一切中”:即在一切情况下。“以此方法”:由类推而把握的义理,后面将会说到。巴利
33.Pāṇātipātova saṃyojanaṃ. Kasmā? Bandhanabhāvena pavattanato nissarituṃ appadānato. Pāṇātipātassa atthitāya so puggalo ‘‘pāṇātipātī’’ti vuccatīti āha – ‘‘pāṇātipātassa…pe… hotī’’ti. Yañhi yassa atthi, tena so apadissatīti. Bahutāyāti acakkhukādibhedena bahubhāvato. Pāṇātipātassa paṭipakkho apāṇātipāto. So pana atthato kāyadvāriko sīlasaṃvaroti āha ‘‘kāyikasīlasaṃvarenā’’ti. Attāpi maṃ upavadeyyātiādi pāṇātipāte ādīnavadassanaṃ. Ādīnavadassino hi tato oramaṇaṃ. Desanāvasenāti aññattha sutte abhidhamme ca dasasu saṃyojanesu pañcasu nīvaraṇesu desanāvasena apariyāpannampi saṃyojanantipi nīvaraṇantipi idha vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Tadatthasambhavato. Tenāha – ‘‘vaṭṭabandhanaṭṭhena hitappaṭicchādanaṭṭhena cā’’ti, pāṇātipāto hi apāṇātipātapaccayaṃ hitaṃ paṭicchādentova uppajjatīti. Eko avijjāsavoti idaṃ sahajātavasena vuttaṃ, upanissayavasena pana itaresampi āsavānaṃ yathārahaṃ sambhavo veditabbo. Pāṇātipātī hi puggalo ‘‘tappaccayaṃ atthaṃ karissāmī’’ti kāme pattheti. Diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, bhavavisesaṃ paccāsīsati. Tattha uppannaṃ vihanati bādhatīti vighāto, dukkhaṃ, pariḷāhanaṃ anatthuppādavasena upatāpanaṃ pariḷāho, ayametesaṃ viseso. Sabbatthāti sabbesu vāresu. Iminā upāyenāti atidesena pana pariggahito attho parato āgamissatīti.
34-40 “在这一句里”——即借助它,把七种情况中同样出现的文句按一般意义概括地把握了,所以说“以此”等。“身的粗暴和语的粗暴”,与其相对的无粗暴也同样有两种,所以说“以身、语的律仪”。正如贪欲是贪、无贪欲是无贪,无瞋恚忧恼便是无害;“在律仪中有安乐”,应看作就是律仪。而不过度贪著则归入念的律仪,不过度慢则归入智的律仪,应当这样理解。这些段落中的一切情况,都应这样连接,这就是它们的关联。巴利
34-40.Imasmiṃ padeti etena sattasupi vāresu tathā āgataṃ padaṃ sāmaññato gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘iminā’’tiādi. Rosanaṃ kāyikaṃ vācasikañcāti tappaṭipakkho arosopi tathā duvidhoti āha ‘‘kāyikavācasikasaṃvarenā’’ti. Yathā abhijjhā lobho, anabhijjhā alobho, evaṃ akodhūpāyāso abyāpādo, saṃvare sukhanti saṃvaroti daṭṭhabbo, anatilobho pana satisaṃvare, anatimāno ñāṇasaṃvare saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imesu pana padesu evaṃ sabbavāresu yojanā kātabbāti sambandho.
“应当这样理解漏的生起”——这里所说的内容因为是合在一起讲的,所以又说“接下来这是简略的判别”。这是为了对所缘不生迷惑。首先在前四种情况里,应当说“我没办法避免”。在解释“我自己也会谴责我”这句话的含义时,应当说“我没办法”;在解释“有智慧的人也会呵责我”这句话的含义时,也应当说“他没办法”。按照这个方式,在后面四种情况里也应当根据具体情况相应地套用。在过慢里说有漏和无明漏,是因为慢不会和邪见一起生起;但过慢确实也会和欲贪一起生起,所以其实应该说“在过慢里有欲漏和无明漏”。不过这个道理因为和前面已说的方式相同,很容易理解,所以就没有特别指出来。巴帝摩卡防护戒,从开头算起,是以四种情况、或者加上第六种、也就是以五种情况来说的;以其余三种情况,说的是安住在巴帝摩卡防护戒中的比丘的思择断;但总的来说,是以全部情况来说安住在比丘身份中的人对在家行为的彻底断除。在这里,于一切处,“做这做那对我是很不合适的”,依这种思择而不去做、舍弃不做,就是思择断。巴利
Evaṃ āsavuppatti veditabbāti ettha vuttassapi ekajjhaṃ vuccamānattā ‘‘puna ayaṃ saṅkhepavinicchayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Asammohatthaṃ ārammaṇassa. Purimesu tāva catūsu vāresu viramituṃ na sakkomīti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Attāpi maṃ upavadeyyā’’ti etassa padassa atthavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘na sakkomī’’ti, ‘‘anuvijjāpi maṃ viññū garaheyyu’’nti etassa padassa atthavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘na sakkotī’’tivattabbaṃ, iminā nayena pacchimesupi catūsu yathārahaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Atimāne bhavāsavaavijjāsavāti vuttaṃ mānena saha diṭṭhiyā anuppajjanato, atimāno pana kāmarāgenapi uppajjatevāti ‘‘atimāne kāmāsavaavijjāsavā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, svāyaṃ nayo vuttanayattā suviññeyyoti na dassito. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ kathitaṃ ādito catūhi chaṭṭhena vāti pañcahi vārehi, sesehi tīhi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitassa bhikkhuno paṭisaṅkhāpahānaṃ, sabbehipi pana bhikkhubhāve ṭhitassa gihivohārasamucchedo kathito. Tattha sabbattha vattaṃ ‘‘idañcidañca mayhaṃ kātuṃ nappatirūpa’’nti paṭisaṅkhānavasena akaraṇaṃ pajahanañca paṭisaṅkhāpahānaṃ.
《欲过患论》的注释巴利
Kāmādīnavakathāvaṇṇanā
42 42.“upasumbheyya”这个词里,“upa”这个前缀是“附近”的意思,“sumbhana”是“投掷、抛散”的意思。正因为如此,对于“tam enaṃ”这个说法,因为表达的是处所的含义,所以用了业格,于是说“在他附近投掷”,意思是在那条狗的附近投掷骨架。因为已经没有肉了,所以叫做“骨架”;通过这句话说明:对于已经去掉肉的骨头,不管是胸骨、脊椎骨还是头骨,“骨架”这个词都可以用。“sunikkanta”的意思是:像刮削干净了一样,毫无差别地刮出来。巴利
42.Upasumbheyyāti ettha upa-saddo samīpattho, sumbhanaṃ vikkhepanaṃ. Teneva tamenanti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha – ‘‘tassa samīpe khipeyyā’’ti, tassa kukkurassa samīpe aṭṭhikaṅkalaṃ khipeyyāti attho. Nimmaṃsattā kaṅkalanti vuccatīti iminā vigatamaṃsāya aṭṭhikaṅkalikāya uraṭṭhimhi vā piṭṭhikaṇṭake vā sīsaṭṭhimhi vā kaṅkala-saddo niruḷhoti dasseti. Sunikkantanti nillikhitaṃ katvāva nibbisesaṃ likhitaṃ.
由于持续以等舍观察一境的状态生起,所以是单一性。因此说“第四禅的舍”。又因为它的所缘也是单一性质的,所以说“它确实……”等。被称为“世间食”的,是因为以尚未遍知的对象被世间所接触,或者因为在世间被称为“食”。依于欲乐,欲的性质和食的性质都存在,而正是这种食性,在直接的意义上才配称为“食”。“欲乐食”是指对欲乐的欲贪。这是从执取的意义、强力执取的意义来说的。巴利
Ekattupaṭṭhānassa ajjhupekkhanavasena pavattiyā ekattā. Tenāha ‘‘catutthajhānupekkhā’’ti. Yasmā panassa ārammaṇampi ekasabhāvameva, tasmā āha ‘‘sā hī’’tiādi. Lokāmisasaṅkhātāti apariññātavatthunā lokena āmasitabbato, loke vā āmisoti saṅkhaṃ gatāya vasena kāmaguṇānaṃ kāmabhāvo ca āmisabhāvo ca, so eva nippariyāyato āmisanti vattabbataṃ arahati. Kāmaguṇāmisāti kāmaguṇe chandarāgā. Gahaṇaṭṭhena bhusaṃ ādānaṭṭhena.
43 43. “飞行”是指在虚空中行走,所以经文说“飞起来行走”。秃鹫之类的鸟并没有斧头、砍刀那样的利器,所以经文说“用嘴尖啄、砍”。在这里,“vissajjeyyun”(应抛落)中的“vissajjana”(抛落)指的是拉拽,因为词根有多种含义;拉拽之后再让它掉落,所以经文说“用爪子拉扯肉片再抛落”。巴利
43. Ḍayanaṃ ākāsena gamananti āha ‘‘uppatitvā gaccheyyā’’ti. Gijjhādīnaṃ vāsipharasu na hotīti āha – ‘‘mukhatuṇḍakena ḍasantā taccheyyu’’nti. Vissajjeyyunti ettha ‘‘vissajjana’’nti ākaḍḍhanaṃ adhippetaṃ anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ, ākaḍḍhanañca anubandhitvā pātananti āha ‘‘maṃsapesiṃ nakhehi kaḍḍhitvā pāteyyu’’nti.
47 适合男子骑乘的男子乘。巴利
47. Purisassa ārohanayogyaṃ poriseyyaṃ.
48 48. 具足而美好的果,就是“具足果”。“果成就”是指具备果实,所以说“多果”。巴利
48. Sampannaṃ sundaraṃ phalamassāti sampannaphalaṃ. Phalūpapannanti phalehi upetanti āha ‘‘bahuphala’’nti.
50 在圣者的律教中,由于断除言说施设,我安住的状态本就是极其遥远、真正遥远。“极远又极远”就是这个意思。因为对某些义理也不了解,所以说他们“不知”;为了显示这是从行为者角度来构词,就以不知者的食物为题,说明应当布施给他们的资具。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
50.Suvidūravidūreti ariyassa vinaye vohārasamucchedato suṭṭhu vidūrabhūte eva vidūre ahaṃ ṭhito. Kassaci nāma atthassapi ajānanato na ājānantīti anājānīyāti kattusādhanamassa dassento ajānanaketi ajānantabhojanasīsena tesaṃ dātabbapaccaye vadati. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
《吉瓦咖经》的注释巴利
5. Jīvakasuttavaṇṇanā
51 51. 因为是被童子抚养的,所以叫“童子养”(kumārabhato);“童子养”本身就是“童子养者”(komārabhacca),就像说“医生就是药”(bhisakkameva bhesajja)一样。巴利
51. Kumārena bhato posāpitoti kumārabhato, kumārabhato eva komārabhacco yathā ‘‘bhisakkameva bhesajja’’nti.
这里“ārabhanti”一词中的“ārabha”这个词,虽然也出现在欲贪、积集、祭祀、策励、犯戒、告知等用法里,但在这里要取“伤害”的意思,所以说“ārabhanti就是杀死”。所谓“指定后才做的”,是指先指定自己,然后以杀害的方式所做、所产生的。在“paṭiccakamma”(缘业)这个词里,“kamma”一词是以业本身为成就义,属于过去时,所以解释说“依于自己而做的”。这是“相业”的另一种说法,就像“缘业而触受”等经文中的用法一样。“相业”是指以相状的形式所应得的业,而不是从造作、令他人造作的角度来说的。这里说“存在缘业”,就是指那肉中存在缘业,正如说“这个人具有此法,所以称为觉悟者”一样。这里的“tesaṃ”指那些尼干陀们。“aññepi”则说明,其他如婆罗门等持有同样见解的人也存在。巴利
Ārabhantīti ettha ārabha-saddo kāmaṃ kāmāyūhanayaññuṭṭhāpanaāpattiāpajjanaviññāpanādīsupi āgato, idha pana hiṃsane icchitabboti āha – ‘‘ārabhantīti ghātentī’’ti. Uddisitvā katanti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.12; sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.294) attānaṃ uddisitvā māraṇavasena kataṃ nibbattitaṃ. Paṭiccakammanti ettha kamma-saddo kammasādhano atītakālikoti āha – ‘‘attānaṃ paṭicca kata’’nti. Nimittakammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ ‘‘paṭicca kammaṃ phusatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.4.75) viya. Nimittakammassāti nimittabhāvena laddhabbakammassa, na karaṇakārāpanavasena. Paṭiccakammaṃ ettha atthīti maṃsaṃ paṭiccakammaṃ yathā ‘‘buddhaṃ etassa atthīti buddho’’ti. Tesanti nigaṇṭhānaṃ. Aññepi brāhmaṇādayo taṃladdhikā attheva.
此处所说的“理由”,指的是合理性;而它并未离开法,因此就称为“法”。所以说:“所谓理由,即是受用三种清净的鱼肉。”
“随顺理由”则是指大众作这样的说明:由于肉与具有合理性的法相顺,故可受用,这是被允许的,因此他们也同样这样说。“那”指的是“明知是特地为自己而作的肉仍去受用”这种行为;因为这种情况完全不存在,它根本不能成为理由;若在没有合理性的情况下受用,那就是非法。“那样的说明”,是指“明知是特地为自己而作的肉仍去受用”这番话;因为它与具有合理性的法不相契合,所以算不上“随顺理由”。外道凭他人所说的理由而成为有理由者:他们宣称“明知……”等而说法,由于以此为理由,便成为有理由者。既然他们应当这样说,那么你们的论说或随说——即“肉可以受用”这一你们的主张,或他人对此所作的随说——也是如此。这正是智者所应呵责的理由:外道暂且不论,其他智者也有应受呵责的理由。谁也不会来到呵责之地,意思是不会陷入应被呵责的境地。他们克服之后而说,意思是压倒、摧伏之后而说;被压倒者骂詈,意思是呵骂。巴利
Kāraṇanti ettha yutti adhippetā, sā eva ca dhammato anapetattā ‘‘dhammo’’ti vuttāti āha – ‘‘kāraṇaṃ nāma tikoṭiparisuddhamacchamaṃsaparibhogo’’ti. Anukāraṇaṃ nāma mahājanassa tathā byākaraṇaṃ yuttiyā dhammassa anurūpabhāvato maṃsaṃ paribhuñjitabbanti anuññātaṃ tatheva kathananti katvā. Tanti ‘‘jānaṃ uddissakataṃ maṃsaṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ paribhuñjanaṃ neva kāraṇaṃ hoti sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvato sati ca ayuttiyaṃ adhammoti katvā. Tathā byākaraṇanti ‘‘jānaṃ uddissakataṃ maṃsaṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti kathanaṃ yuttiyā dhammassa ananurūpabhāvato na anukāraṇaṃ hoti. Parehi vuttakāraṇena sakāraṇo hutvāti pare titthiyā ‘jāna’ntiādinā dhammaṃ kathenti vadanti, tena kāraṇabhūtena sakāraṇo hutvā. Tehi tathā vattabbo eva hutvā tumhākaṃ vādo vā anuvādo vā ‘‘maṃsaṃ paribhuñjitabba’’nti pavattā tumhākaṃ kathā vā parato parehi tathā pavattitā tassā anukathā vā. Viññūhi garahitabbakāraṇanti titthiyā tāva tiṭṭhantu, tato aññehi paṇḍitehi garahitabbakāraṇaṃ. Koci na āgacchatīti garahitabbataṃ na āpajjatīti attho. Abhibhavitvā ācikkhantīti abhibhuyya madditvā kathenti, abhibhūtena akkosantīti attho.
52 所谓“以理由”,是指受用之心不清净的各种原因。比丘亲眼看到那是特地为自己准备的。那样的肉因为不适合受用,所以是令心不清净、带来心染污的原因。现在,为了具体说明所见、所闻、所疑这三种情况,所以说“于所见等中”等语句。其中,“脱离那两者而起的怀疑”,是指不依靠“这是所见”“这是所闻”这两者,而只是单纯地怀疑:“这该不会是为了这位比丘而杀、而准备的呢?”“含摄一切者”,是指它能涵盖所有这三种怀疑的情况。巴利
52.Kāraṇehīti paribhogacittassa avisuddhatāhetūhi. Bhikkhū uddissakataṃ diṭṭhaṃ. Tādisamaṃsañhi paribhogānārahattā cittaavisuddhiyā kāraṇaṃ cittasaṃkilesāvahato. Idāni diṭṭhasutaparisaṅkitāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhādīsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tadubhayavimuttaparisaṅkitanti ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ suta’’nti imaṃ ubhayaṃ anissāya – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho imaṃ bhikkhuṃ uddissa vadhitvā sampādita’’nti kevalameva parisaṅkitaṃ. Sabbasaṅgāhakoti sabbesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parisaṅkitānaṃ saṅgaṇhanako.
“喜庆等”里的“等”字,把招待、回礼这一类事情也包括进去了。“他们成为没有疑惑的人”,是说完全没有任何猜疑。“对其他的人”这句,对不知情的人是允许的;对知情者,仅此即犯戒。“正是那些人”,指的就是那些被特意指定而做这件事的人。巴利
Maṅgalādīnanti ādi-saddena āhunapāhunādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nibbematikā hontīti sabbena sabbaṃ parisaṅkitābhāvamāha. Itaresanti ajānantānaṃ vaṭṭati, jānato evettha āpatti hoti. Teyevāti ye uddissa kataṃ, teyeva.
为了说明受用指定肉和受用不如法的肉之间的区别,所以说了“然而,不如法的肉……”等话。在前一种情况下,是有心犯戒;在后一种情况下,是无心犯戒。因此说:“即使不知道是不如法的肉而吃了,也仍然是犯戒。”“受用”的意思是:我说这是可以受用的。巴利
Uddissakatamaṃsaparibhogato akappiyamaṃsaparibhogassa visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘akappiyamaṃsaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Purimasmiṃ sacittakā āpatti, itarasmiṃ acittakā. Tenāha – ‘‘akappiyamaṃsaṃ ajānitvā bhuttassapi āpattiyevā’’ti. Paribhoganti paribhuñjitabbanti vadāmīti attho.
53 “那样的”是指受用那种三方面都清净的鱼肉。“即便是修习慈心住者”中的“亦”字,也包括了不修慈心住的人。为了说明修习慈心住者在受用时,其无过失达到极致,所以说了“在此,吉瓦咖,比丘们……”等话。“不作限定地”就是不特别区分,以一般的方式来谈。因为世尊在《玛哈瓦恰经》中以“然而,瓦恰,当比丘的渴爱已被断除……”等语句,没有限定自己而说。瓦恰也确实这样说过:“姑且不论乔达摩大师,在乔达摩大师的弟子中,可有一位比丘以漏尽……具足而住呢?”同样,在《商羯经》中以“在此,跋拉瓦迦,比丘依止某个村庄或城镇而住……”等语句,也没有限定自己而说。该经后文确实有:“而这位具寿所开示的法,甚深、难见、难觉、寂静、殊胜、超越寻思、微妙、唯智者所体验,那样的法绝不是贪婪者所能善加开示的。”因此说“世尊确实在《玛哈瓦恰经》、《商羯经》和这部经这三处,都是只以自己为对象而作开示”。“连同肉汁一起”指的是连同鱼肉在内的食物受用,因为这里所说的就是鱼肉。巴利
53.Tādisassāti tikoṭiparisuddhassa macchamaṃsassa paribhoge. Mettāvihārinopīti api-saddena amettāvihārinopi. Mettāvihārino paribhoge sikhāppattā anavajjatāti dassetuṃ ‘‘idha, jīvaka, bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aniyametvāti avisesetvā sāmaññato. Yasmā bhagavatā – ‘‘yato kho, vaccha, bhikkhuno taṇhā pahīnā hotī’’tiādinā mahāvacchagottasutte (ma. ni. 2.194) attā aniyametvā vutto. Tathā hi vacchagotto – ‘‘tiṭṭhatu bhavaṃ gotamo, atthi pana bhoto gotamassa ekabhikkhupi sāvako āsavānaṃ khayā…pe… upasampajja viharatī’’ti āha, ‘‘idha, bhāradvāja, bhikkhu aññataraṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharatī’’tiādinā caṅkīsutte (ma. ni. 2.430) attā aniyametvā vutto. Tathā hi tattha parato – ‘‘yaṃ kho pana ayamāyasmā dhammaṃ deseti, gambhīro so dhammo duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo, na so dhammo sudesanīyo luddenā’’tiādinā desanā āgatā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavatā hi mahāvacchagottasutte, caṅkīsutte imasmiṃ sutteti tīsu ṭhānesu attānaṃyeva sandhāya desanā katā’’ti. Maṃsūpasecanova adhippeto macchamaṃsasahitassa āhārassa paribhogabhāvato macchamaṃsassa ca idha adhippetattā.
不执著,不被系缚。所谓“因渴爱而迷醉”,是指由于渴爱而陷入迷醉。“不陷入”,意思是:没有被渴爱征服、覆盖;不是吞下去、彻底消化之后就停住在里面。因此说“把一切都撕碎吞下”等等。在这里,食物的过患就在于它的可厌性,所以说“只靠一夜的停留”等等。这个意思就是“具有出离慧”:他拥有这样的慧——它依照“只是为了这个身体的维持”等语所开示,能从对食物系著的欲贪中出离,能决断义理的关联。“为了这个目的”,就是为了这个意义。“如果这样的话”,意思是:如果不主张“梵天神是对修习慈心住者的称呼”,而是认为对于与慈心住相对立的法,梵天神只是有剩余地断除,世尊则是无剩余地断除,那么,你若是针对这个意义说了那番话,我就认可你所说的;但这并不是仅仅因为共同拥有修习慈心住者的共同性。这就是它的意思。巴利
Agathito appaṭibaddho. Taṇhāmucchanāyāti taṇhāyanavasena mucchāpattiyā. Anajjhopanno taṇhāya abhibhavitvā na ajjhotthaṭo, gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā na saṇṭhitoti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbaṃ ālumpitvā’’tiādi. Idha ādīnavo āhārassa paṭikūlabhāvoti āha ‘‘ekarattivāsenā’’tiādi. Ayamattho āhāraparibhogoti atthasaṃyojanaparicchedikā ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.182; ma. ni. 1.23; 2.24; 3.75; saṃ. ni. 4.120) pavattā āhārapaṭibaddhachandarāganissaraṇabhūtā paññā assa atthīti nissaraṇapañño. Idamatthanti etamatthāya. Evaṃ santeti ‘‘brahmāti ca mettāvihārino samaññā’’ti avatvā ye dhammā mettāvihārassa paṭipakkhabhūtā, tattha sāvasesaṃ pahāsi brahmā, anavasesaṃ pahāsi bhagavāti sace te idaṃ sandhāya bhāsitaṃ, evaṃ sante tava idaṃ yathāvuttavacanaṃ anujānāmi, na mettāvihāritāsāmaññamattatoti attho.
55 说了“单独的连结”之后,为了说明它是各别不同的连结,才说了“因为在此”等话。“关闭了门户”,意思是:因为允许受用鱼肉,就堵住了他人非议的门,阻断了指责的路。怎样显示对众生的怜悯呢?外道以怜悯众生为借口禁止受用鱼肉,这是不对的;世尊所允许的,只是三方面清净的鱼肉。正如经中所说:“吉瓦咖,我说在三种情况下可以受用肉。”律藏中也说:“提婆达多,三方面清净的鱼肉是我所允许的。”而受用三方面清净之肉的人,对众生的怜悯是坚定不移的。为了展开“显示对众生的怜悯”这个简要说法的含义,才说了“如果”等话。巴利
55.‘‘Pāṭiyekkoanusandhī’’ti vatvā visuṃ anusandhibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dvāraṃ thaketīti macchamaṃsaparibhogānuññāya aññesaṃ vacanadvāraṃ pidahati, codanāpathaṃ nirundhati. Kathaṃ sattānuddayaṃ dasseti? Sattānuddayamukhena bāhirakānaṃ macchamaṃsaparibhogapaṭikkhepo tayidaṃ micchā, tikoṭiparisuddhasseva macchamaṃsassa paribhogo bhagavatā anuññāto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘tīhi kho ahaṃ, jīvaka, ṭhānehi maṃsaṃ paribhoganti vadāmī’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.52). Vinayepi (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) vuttaṃ – ‘‘tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ, devadatta, macchamaṃsaṃ mayā anuññāta’’nti. Tikoṭiparisuddhañca bhuñjantānaṃ sattesu anuddayā niccalā. ‘‘Sattānuddayaṃ dassetī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sace hī’’tiādimāha.
“以第一个理由”,这是从说法和修行两方面说的,也就是以第一个理由——伤害其他众生为因。那个众生被拖拽。“以颤抖的喉咙”,是因为套索勒住喉咙,忍受不了而颤抖。这成为大福德,是因为没有希求他人恭敬的期待,或者是出于利益他人的意乐——这就是要表达的意思。“我,尊者”等话为什么说呢?是针对“仅仅通过皈依就成为已皈依者”这种批评,才说了“这个”等话。“深入者”,是从头到尾随念经文、思量义理。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Paṭhamena kāraṇenāti desanāvasenapi payogavasenapi paṭhamena parūpaghātahetunā. Kaḍḍhito so pāṇo. Galena pavedhentenāti yottagalena karaṇena asayhamānena. Bahupuññameva hoti āsādanāpekkhāya abhāvato, hitajjhāsayattā vāti adhippāyo. Esāhaṃ, bhantetiādi kasmā vuttaṃ, saraṇagamanavaseneva gahitasaraṇoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aya’’ntiādi. Ogāhantotiādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā suttaṃ anussaranto atthaṃ upadhārento. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第6章 优波离经的注释巴利
6. Upālisuttavaṇṇanā
56 56. “穿斗篷的人”称为pāvāriko,这是他家族传下来的名字。不过这个人有很多财富、很多产业,住在城里,处在首富的位置。因此说“斗篷商首富”。因为身材高,所以叫“长身”。据说他身高超出邻床一肘半。这样得到名字,就是获得了“长苦行者”这个称呼。在外道的圈子里,并没有“团食”这个说法,所以这里是借用佛教的说法,说“从团食归来者”,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
56. Pāvāraṃ pārupatīti pāvāriko, idaṃ tassa kulasamudāgataṃ nāmaṃ, so pana mahaddhano mahābhogo nagare seṭṭhiṭṭhāne ṭhito. Tenāha ‘‘dussapāvārikaseṭṭhino’’ti. Dīghattā dīghatamattā. So kira pamāṇato upavacchayato diyaḍḍharatanaṃ atikkamma ṭhito. Evaṃladdhanāmoti ‘‘dīghatapassī’’ti laddhasamañño. Bāhirāyataneti titthiyasamaye piṇḍapātoti vohāro natthi, tasmā sāsanavohārena ‘‘piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto’’ti vuttanti adhippāyo.
“开示”就是宣说。“安立”就是从彼此混杂中区分开来、加以界定。“以作用”就是通过行为。“以生起”就是通过活动的发生。说到“他设定诸罚杖”,这里为什么世尊一开始不那样问呢?因为那种说法在那个意义上并不是自然通用的表达,在佛教中、在世俗中以及其他教派中都没有这样的用法,这纯粹只是那个尼干陀独有的、类似固执编造的说法。为了显示这个意思,世尊才直接说“他设定诸业”。“无心”就是没有心识,意思是并非由心所发动。那么这两者没有心又怎么可能存在呢?针对这个质疑,那里举出例子说“就比如,据说”等等。“已分别”就是从意义上各不相同的。“已区分”就是即使从词句上、通过不同的修饰语来看也是各不相同的。“想要使他的说法成立”,就是长苦行者想要让他先前所说的那套话站得住脚。因为那套说法一旦成立,借着这个因缘,优波离居士就会来到那个地方,见到正法之后,对佛教生起净信。巴利
Dassetīti deseti. Ṭhapetīti aññamaññasaṅkarato vavatthapeti. Kiriyāyāti karaṇena. Pavattiyāti pavattanena. Daṇḍāni paññapetīti ettha kasmā bhagavatā āditova tathā na pucchitanti? Yasmā sā tasmiṃ atthe sabhāvanirutti na hoti, sāsane loke samayantaresu ca tādiso samudācāro natthi, kevalaṃ pana tasseva nigaṇṭhassāyaṃ koṭṭhālakasadiso samudācāroti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kammāni paññapeti’’ iccevāha. Acittakanti cittarahitaṃ, cittena asamuṭṭhāpitanti attho. Kathaṃ pana tadubhayassa cittena vinā sambhavoti codanaṃ sandhāya tattha nidassanamāha ‘‘yathā kirā’’tiādi. Paṭivibhattānanti atthato bhinnānaṃ. Paṭivisiṭṭhānanti visesanapadavasena saddatopi bhinnānaṃ. Vacanaṃ patiṭṭhapetukāmoti dīghatapassino yathāvuttavacanaṃ patiṭṭhapetukāmo. Tasmiñhi patiṭṭhāpite tenappasaṅgena āgato, upāli gahapati tasmiṃ padese dhammaṃ disvā sāsane abhippasīdissati.
论本身之所以叫“论事”,是因为它成了提出指责的依据。所谓“他在论中让他站住了脚”,是说在论事中,或者就那个意义而言,他使之站住脚。就这样,在那场论中、在那个意义上,为了不让他因害怕被提出指责而不否认,他反复让长苦行者站住脚,最多到第三次。所谓“论”,指的是过失。巴利
Kathā eva upari vādāropanassa vatthubhāvato kathāvatthu. Kathāyaṃ patiṭṭhapesīti kathāvatthusmiṃ, tadatthe vā patiṭṭhapesi. Yathā taṃ vādāropanabhayena na avajānāti, evaṃ tassaṃ kathāyaṃ, tasmiṃ vā atthe dīghatapassiṃ yāvatatiyaṃ vāde patiṭṭhapesi. Vādanti dosaṃ.
57 57. 现在,为了把与思相应的法也一并拿来,并按照身业等分类来展示,所以说了“再者”等话。其中,把三种身恶行称为“身业”等,这是依据经文里“业的造作”那句话,就不善业已经成立而说的;而前面说的“欲界八种善思”等,则是把有过失的和没有过失的从总体上合在一起展示。那么,为什么这里不直接取思呢?回答说:“在这部经里,业是主导。”按身业等分类来说的业才是主导、是核心、是前导,而不只是思本身。即使以“诸业”这样的名称出现,也仍然是以思为主导,意思是说:在那里是把思当作核心、当作前导来讲的。那么,怎么理解即使以“业”或“诸业”的名称出现,它们仍然以思为主导呢?回答说:“无论在何处……即得。”这里的“无论在何处”,是指在任何一个门里。“彼已说”是指那个思已经说过了——凡是以“身行”等名义,也就是令任何一种业在身门等处生起的策发思,它的相应法也以此为首,不论是世间的还是出世间的,都算作业;而贪欲等则应看作思这一边的。巴利
57. Idāni cetanāsampayuttadhammampi gahetvā kāyakammādivasena saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāmātiādi ‘‘kammassa kiriyāyā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ akusalakammassa adhigatattā vuttaṃ, pubbe pana aṭṭhakāmāvacarakusalacetanātiādi sāvajjaṃ anavajjañca sāmaññato ekajjhaṃ katvā dassitaṃ. Kasmā panettha cetanā na gahitāti āha ‘‘imasmiṃ sutte kammaṃ dhura’’nti. Kāyakammādibhedaṃ kammameva dhuraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ, na cetanāmattameva. Evamāgatepīti kammānīti evaṃ nāmena āgatepi cetanā dhuraṃ, tattha cetanaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā vuttanti adhippāyo. Kathaṃ pana tattha kammanti vā kammānīti vā āgate tesaṃ cetanāya dhurabhāvoti āha ‘‘yattha katthaci…pe… labhatī’’ti. Tattha yattha katthacīti yasmiṃ kismiñci dvāre. Sā vuttāvāti sā cetanā vuttāva, yā kāyasaṅkhārādipariyāyena (yassa kassaci kammassa kāyadvārādīsu pavattāpanacetanā) sampayuttadhammāpi tadaggena lokiyāpi lokuttarāpi kammameva, abhijjhādayo pana cetanāpakkhikāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“大”是指苦果。他不会疲倦,因为他宣称自己具有神通变化。现在为了说明他们那种神通变化的特质,才说了“正是如此”等话。如果说他在讲到不善的身业、语业是“大”时都不疲倦,那世尊为什么在这里又说不善的意业有大罪过呢?于是回答说“然而,在这个地方”等等。他修行的方式,是仅仅依靠三次劝请的安立就走完了全程。因此说“即使看不到任何义利的成就”也是如此。巴利
Mahantanti kaṭukaphalaṃ. Na kilamati sappāṭihāriyattā paṭiññāya. Idāni tesaṃ sappāṭihāriyataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi akusalaṃ patvā kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ mahantanti vadanto na kilamati, atha kasmā bhagavā idha akusalaṃ manokammaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ kathesīti āha ‘‘imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne’’tiādi. Yāvatatiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpanamattena gatamaggaṃ paṭipajjanto. Tenāha ‘‘kiñci atthanipphattiṃ apassantopī’’ti.
58 58. 因为有个愚笨的小男孩住在她的住处,所以她是“愚稚女”。由于被尼乾陀们承认为大师并受到他们尊崇,所以他是“大尼乾陀”。巴利
58. Nivāsaṭṭhānabhūto bālako etissā atthīti bālakinī. Satthupaṭiññātatāya nigaṇṭhānaṃ mahāti sambhāvitattā mahānigaṇṭho.
60 “能牵引”(āvaṭṭanī):它能把人从原来的状态拉回来,让人跟着自己的掌控转,这就是谄幻(māyā)。所以说:“先牵引过去,再牢牢抓住,这就是幻术。”凡是妄称导师的人,他的心在面对佛陀时根本生不起来,这是这里的法性。如果他不舍弃这个妄称,还来到佛陀面前,他的头就会裂成七分。所以世尊一开始就为了不让这个愚人毁灭,让他无法见到佛陀。这个道理应当通过与巴提咖之子的会合来说明。接着开示“得见成就决定”的范畴:“如来……他曾来到过你们这里吗?”巴利
60. Āvaṭṭeti purimākārato nivatteti attano vase vatteti etāyāti āvaṭṭanī, māyā. Tenāha ‘‘āvaṭṭetvā gahaṇamāya’’nti. Satthupaṭiññānaṃ buddhadassane cittameva na uppajjati, ayamettha dhammatā. Sace pana so taṃ paṭiññaṃ appahāya buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāvaṃ upagaccheyya, sattadhā muddhā phaleyya, tasmā bhagavā ‘‘mā ayaṃ bālo vinassī’’tiāditova yathā sammukhībhāvaṃ na labhati, tathā karoti. Svāyamattho pāthikaputtasamāgamena dīpetabbo. Dassanasampattiniyāmamāha ‘‘tathāgataṃ hī’’tiādi. Āgamā nu kho idha tumhākaṃ santikaṃ.
61 安住在语言真实上,就是站在自己已经承认、已经声明的承诺上不动摇。巴利
61.Vacīsacce patiṭṭhahitvāti yathāpaṭiññātāya paṭiññāya ṭhatvā.
62 62. 有些众生在凉水里本来不会死,可是在喝水的时候却死了,它们也是因为享用那种凉水而被杀死的。所以苦行者的主张是:一切凉水都绝对不应该受用。或者认为普通的水就是有情,这是古派尼干陀的主张。因此说“由于有情的认知而拒绝凉水”。这与现在新派尼干陀的说法相矛盾,因为他们承认在地等九句义之外还有别的生命。由于心里生起想喝凉水、想受用凉水的欲望,即使在病中,众生的心也不会那样持续现起。因此说“于是他的意杖就在(就在那种心生起的状态下)破坏(防护之道已经损坏)”。其中“tena”是指以想饮凉水并受用之欲。“assa”是指如上所说的尼干陀。“tattheva”是指在那样生起心的状态中。破坏是因为防护被损坏了。那样的尼干陀如果得到凉水,还能活一段时间;但由于得不到,喉咙、嘴唇、上颚、舌头等逐渐干枯,被彻底的内烧所制伏,就会死去。因此说“得不到凉水就会死去”。为什么?因为对于依止于想喝凉水的心来说,死亡就会发生,所以说“意杖即使破坏了,也会把死亡拖来”。然而,因为按照外道的见解,具有那样心的尼干陀会往生到名为 manosatta 的天中,所以说“意杖即使破坏了,也会把结生拖来”。“iti”就是如此,以“idhāssa nigaṇṭho”等这样的方式。“naṃ”是指优波离居士。“mahanto”是指他使人说“与意相连结而死”这样的话,这是意趣。巴利
62. Sītodake amatā pāṇā pānakāle pana maranti, tepi tena sītodakaparibhogena māritā honti, tasmā tapassinā nāma sabbena sabbaṃ sītodakaṃ na paribhuñjitabbanti tesaṃ laddhi. Pākatikaṃ vā udakaṃ sattoti purātanānaṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ laddhi. Tenāha ‘‘sattasaññāya sītodakaṃ paṭikkhipantī’’ti. Tesaṃ taṃ adhunātananigaṇṭhānaṃ vādena virujjhati. Te hi pathavīādinavapadatthato aññameva jīvitaṃ paṭijānanti. Cittena sītodakaṃ pātukāmo paribhuñjitukāmo hoti roge ṭhatvāpi sattānaṃ cittassa tathā na vitatatā. Tenāha – ‘‘tenassa manodaṇḍo tattheva bhijjatī’’ti. Tenāti sītodakaṃ pātuṃ paribhuñjituñca icchanena. Assāti yathāvuttassa nigaṇṭhassa. Tatthevāti tathācittuppādane eva. Bhijjati saṃvarassa vikopitattā. Tathābhūto so nigaṇṭho sītodakaṃ ce labheyya, katipayaṃ kālaṃ jīveyya, alābhena pana parisussamānakaṇṭhoṭṭhatālujivhāādiko sabbaso paridāhābhibhūto mareyya. Tenāha – ‘‘sītodakaṃ alabhamāno kālaṃ kareyyā’’ti. Kasmā? Yasmā sītodakaṃ pivāya sannissitacittassa maraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘manodaṇḍo pana bhinnopi cutimpi ākaḍḍhatī’’ti. Yasmā pana tathābhūtacittassa nigaṇṭhassa manosattesu nāma devesu upapatti hotīti titthiyānaṃ laddhi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘manodaṇḍo pana bhinnopi paṭisandhimpi ākaḍḍhatī’’ti. Itīti evaṃ ‘‘idhāssa nigaṇṭho’’tiādiākārena. Nanti upāliṃ gahapatiṃ. Mahantoti vadāpesi ‘‘manopaṭibaddho kālaṅkarotī’’ti vadantoti adhippāyo.
“近事男”指优波离居士。通过“由于迷恋”等语句,从顺向和逆向两方面说明了意杖的严重性。“仅凭心相续的生起而已”是指没有身杖和语杖,纯粹只是心相续在流转。“即使破裂”中的“即使”一词,也包含了“即使没有破裂”的情况。“不导向出离”是指没有神变、不适当,这就是其含义。“近事男观察”是把格位转换后所作的连句。“问题敏慧”是指对于想要了解的义理,能自然生起解答的智慧。巴利
Upāsakassāti upālissa gahapatissa. Mucchāvasenātiādinā anvayato byatirekato ca manodaṇḍassa mahantataṃ vibhāveti. Cittasantatippavattimattenevāti vinā kāyadaṇḍena vacīdaṇḍena ca kevalaṃ cittasantatippavattimattena. Bhijjitvāpīti ettha pi-saddena abhijjitvāpi. Aniyyānikāti appāṭihīrā, ayuttāti attho. Sallakkhesi upāsakoti vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā yojanā. Pañhapaṭibhānānīti ñātuṃ icchite atthe uppajjanakapaṭibhānāni.
当有人说出“被心系缚而死去”时,从含义上就已经承认了意杖比它更殊胜,所以论师说:“现在说‘意杖是巨大的’这句话。”同样地,也曾这样说:“他让人说出:‘意杖才是强大而巨大的。’”巴利
‘‘Manopaṭibaddho kālaṃ karotī’’ti vadantena atthato manodaṇḍassa taduttarabhāvo paṭiññāto hotīti āha ‘‘idāni manodaṇḍo mahantoti idaṃ vacana’’nti. Tathā ceva vuttaṃ – ‘‘manodaṇḍova balavā mahantoti vadāpesī’’ti.
63 从杀生等开始制止,这种制止叫“制”。有四种制,就是“四制”;以这四种制所包含的防护来防护,就是“四制防护所防护者”。不过在义注里,“制”这个字是“部分”的意思,所以说“以这四个部分”。可爱的色等所缘,因为愚者以贪爱之力修习它,所以称为“已修习”,因此说:“‘已修习’指五欲。”巴利
63. Pāṇātipātādito yamanaṃ yāmo, catubbidho yāmo catuyāmo, catuyāmasaṅkhātena saṃvarena saṃvuto cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvuto. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yāma-saddo koṭṭhāsapariyāyoti ‘‘iminā catukoṭṭhāsenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Piyajātikaṃ rūpādiārammaṇaṃ rāgavasena bālehi bhāvanīyattā ‘‘bhāvita’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘bhāvitanti pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti.
能阻止一切恶和漏的,就是“一切阻止者”,在九种句义里是第七种句义。因为这位一切阻止者阻止了恶而安住,所以叫“一切阻止者所阻止者”。因此说:“以一切阻止恶的方式阻止了恶。”正因如此,对于一切应当被阻止的漏都能抖落掉,所以叫“一切阻止抖落者”。因为以阻止应当被阻止之物的方式与阻止一切者相接触,所以叫“一切阻止所触者”。“团杀”指突然杀害,意思是不经思虑的杀生。“在哪个部分”是指在三个杖的部分中,是哪一个部分。巴利
Yo sabbaṃ pāpaṃ āsavañca vāretīti sabbavārī, tassa navasu padatthesu sattamo padattho, tena sabbavārinā pāpaṃ vāritvā ṭhitoti sabbavārivārito. Tenāha ‘‘sabbena pāpavāraṇena vāritapāpo’’ti. Tato eva sabbassa vāritabbassa āsavassa dhunanato sabbavāridhuto. Vāritabbassa nivāraṇavasena sabbavārino phuṭo phusitoti sabbavāriphuṭo. Saṅghātanti sahasā hananaṃ, asañcetanikavadhanti attho. Katarasmiṃ koṭṭhāseti tīsu daṇḍakoṭṭhāsesu katarakoṭṭhāse.
64 “堆”就是被堆积、被聚拢起来的东西,所以经文说“一堆肉,就是一堆肉”。以持明者的神变之力而有神通。然而这种神变,只有具足威德的人才能成就,不是随便什么人都能成就的。因此经文说“具足威德者”。他是完全依靠明的威德才具足威德的。他已经在心上获得了自在,这是因为他把能产生威德的那种明修得纯熟了的缘故。世尊在这里是想随顺世间的通称,向优波离居士说明心自在,所以才这样说。因为世间人认为:“靠修习所成的神变而有神通、得到心自在的人,能够伤害别人。”他们确实就是这样赞叹那些仙人的,称颂仙人的威德。至于这里还有哪些话需要说明,后面会接着讲到。巴利
64. Khaliyati samādiyatīti khalaṃ, rāsīti āha – ‘‘ekaṃ maṃsakhalanti ekaṃ maṃsarāsi’’nti. Vijjādharaiddhiyā iddhimā. Sā pana iddhi yasmā ānubhāvasampannasseva ijjhati, na yassa kassaci. Tasmā āha ‘‘ānubhāvasampanno’’ti. Vijjānubhāvavaseneva ānubhāvasampanno. Citte vasībhāvappatto ānubhāvāya eva vijjāya paguṇabhāvāpādanena. Etena vasībhāvaṃ lokiyasamaññāvasena bhagavā upāliṃ gahapatiṃ paññapetukāmo evamāha. Lokikā hi ‘‘bhāvanāmayaiddhiyā iddhimā cetovasībhāvappatto parūpaghātaṃ karotī’’ti maññanti. Tathā hi te isayo paresaṃ saṃvaṇṇenti, isīnaṃ ānubhāvaṃ kittenti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissatīti.
65 完全成为阿兰若,就是彻底地成为阿兰若。是以阿兰若的实质而成为阿兰若,不是只在名称上成为阿兰若。为了诸仙人,就是为了羞辱诸仙人。巴利
65.Araññameva hutvāti sabbaso araññameva hutvā. Araññabhāvena araññaṃ jātaṃ, na nāmamattena. Isīnaṃ atthāyāti isīnaṃ āsādanatthāya.
在离戈达瓦里河岸不远的地方。“心生嫉妒”:指他心想“这些人不来围绕侍奉我”,于是心生嫉妒。“真是污秽”:指因泥垢、齿垢、发尘等而身体污秽不净。“未涂眼圈、未加装饰”:指完全没涂眼圈,也完全没有装饰。那时候,人们相信“按时涂眼是吉祥的”,所以把“未涂眼”单独提出来说。巴利
Godhāvarītīrato nātidūre. Usūyamānoti ‘‘na maṃ esa jano parivāretī’’ti usūyaṃ karonto. Kiliṭṭho vatāti paṅkadantarajasiratādīhi kiliṭṭhasarīro. Anañjitamaṇḍitoti anañjitakkhiko sabbena, sabbaṃ amaṇḍito ca. Tasmiṃ kāle ‘‘kālasseva akkhīnaṃ añjanaṃ maṅgala’’nti manussānaṃ laddhi, tasmā anañjanaṃ visuṃ gahitaṃ.
国王接受了他的话:国王接受了那位国师的话,说道:“尊者,吠陀中会有这样的记载,是这样,尊者。”心已炙热:指内心被烧得滚烫。因为鼻孔不够用来呼吸,所以用嘴喘气。巴利
Rājā tassa vacanaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘vedesu īdisaṃ āgataṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ, bhante’’ti rājā tassa purohitassa vacanaṃ gahetvā. Usumajātahadayoti uttattahadayo. Nāsikānaṃ appahonte mukhena assasanto.
战胜后归来,应等待与星宿相应之时,所坐之处即胜利军营之处。此乃为令即使未参与降雨等恶业者,亦因随喜而纳入其中而作。所作物品之雨,即饰品之雨。大众随喜已生起,此为句义连接。乐于奉母者:有一名为拉玛之人,对母亲正行孝养。未参与者的意思是未随喜者。巴利
Vijitajayehi āgantvā nakkhattayuttaṃ āgamentehi nisīditabbaṭṭhānaṃ jayakhandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ. Udakavuṭṭhipātanādi tasmiṃ pāpakamme asamaṅgibhūtānampi samanuññatāya antokaraṇatthaṃ kataṃ. Katabhaṇḍavuṭṭhīti ābharaṇavassaṃ. Mahājano samanuñño jātoti yojanā. Mātuposakarāmoti mātari sammāpaṭipanno rāmo nāma eko puriso. Asamaṅgibhūtānanti asamanuññānaṃ.
“散落”是因为不肯听从教导。“火花”就是火星。“落在身上”是说火星从这边那边掉到身体上。据说,他们把地狱打开,展示给大众看。巴利
Avakiriyāti asussūsataṃ paṭicca. Phuliṅgānīti aggikaṇāni. Patanti kāyeti kāye ito cito nipatanti. Ete kira nirayaṃ vivaritvā mahājanassa dassenti.
所谓“随宜安稳处”,意思是:我们并不是特意要去某个地方,而是哪里能让出家人住得安稳舒适,我们就去那个随宜安稳的地方。僧,是和合聚集的意思。众,是因为可以按各个不同的团体来计算,所以叫众。已为众,是指心意一致,聚合成一团。至于“不与取”等说法,也要这样理解:那是从地狱受报之后转生人间时,由残余的业报所带来的结果。巴利
Yathāphāsukaṭṭhānanti mayaṃ kañcipi desaṃ uddissa na gacchāma, yattha pana vasantassa pabbajitassa phāsu hoti, taṃ yathāphāsukaṭṭhānaṃ gacchāmāti adhippāyo. Saṅghāti saṃhatā. Gaṇāti taṃtaṃseṇibhāvena gaṇitabbatāya gaṇā. Gaṇībhūtāti ekajjhāsayā hutvā rāsibhūtā. Adinnādānantiādīsupi niraye paccitvā manussalokaṃ āgatassa vipākāvasesenāti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
我要激励他们,意思是我要让他们受到敬重。这里句子的连接关系是:他心里盘算着他们该做什么。他到底在想什么?他生起嗔恨后,思惟伤害他们的方法。所以经文接着说“他在说法结束时……”等等。“龙巴拉树脂等粘稠物”,指的是由龙巴拉树脂、芥子、昂哥拉、油、翅子树树脂等成分形成的泥泞物。他们用地狱之类的说法触碰、折磨他们。“六门所缘”,指的是作为眼等六门对象的色等外境。巴利
Paggaṇhissāmīti sambhāvanaṃ uppādessāmi. Nesaṃ kattabbanti cintesīti yojanā. Kiṃ cintesi? Āghātaṃ uppādetvā anatthakaraṇūpāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘so dhammakathāpariyosāne’’tiādi. Nāgabalapicchillādīnanti nāgabalasāsapaaṅkolatelakaṇikāraniyyāsādīnaṃ cikkhallānaṃ. Viheṭhayiṃsu nirayādikathāhi ghaṭṭentā. Chadvārārammaṇeti cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ dvārānaṃ ārammaṇabhūte rūpādivisaye.
九种雨:就是雨水、善花雨、摩沙迦钱雨、咖哈巴那钱雨、饰物雨、武器雨、炭火雨、石头雨、沙雨,这些就是九种雨。他欺诳:就是装作恭敬供养的样子,实际上却在做轻慢的事,用伤害对方的方式欺骗他。无过失者:就是没有过错、没有冒犯别人的人。巴利
Nava vuṭṭhiyoti udakavuṭṭhi sumanapupphavuṭṭhi māsakavuṭṭhi kahāpaṇavuṭṭhi ābharaṇavuṭṭhi āvudhavuṭṭhi aṅgāravuṭṭhi pāsāṇavuṭṭhi vālikāvuṭṭhīti imā nava vuṭṭhiyo. Avañcayīti sakkāraṃ karonto viya hutvā asakkāraṃ karonto anatthacaraṇena vañcayi. Adūsaketi anaparādhe.
“见到就吉祥的婆罗门少女”这个说法,出现在《本生注》等文献里(jā. aṭṭha. 4.15. mātaṅgajātakavaṇṇanā),但在这里,她是“富商之女”。“为了婚事”,就是为了娶亲;“那个被派去的人的”,是指属于那个被派去的人。由于那种能让人投生到低贱家族的业已经获得了机会,他就出生在旃陀罗的胎中。巴利
‘‘Diṭṭhamaṅgalikā brāhmaṇakaññā’’ti jātakaṭṭhakathādīsu (jā. aṭṭha. 4.15.mātaṅgajātakavaṇṇanā) āgataṃ, idha pana ‘‘seṭṭhidhītā’’ti. Vāreyyatthāyāti āvāhatthāya, assāti pesitapuggalassa. Tādisena nīcakulasaṃvattaniyena kammunā laddhokāsena caṇḍālayoniyaṃ nibbatto.
在皮屋里,也就是用皮革覆盖的屋子里。他出生时得来的名字就叫马当嘎。那是指那个铃铛。他一边敲着它,一边让它发出声响。他走上大路,来到那位“见即吉祥”者的家门口附近。巴利
Cammageheti cammena chādite gehe. Mātaṅgotvevassa nāmaṃ ahosi jātisamudāgataṃ. Tanti ghaṇṭaṃ. Vādento tālanena saddaṃ karonto. Mahāpathaṃ paṭipajji diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya gehadvārasamīpena.
她的那些做杂役的仆人和贴身侍候的人,还有依附她的酒鬼之类,见他膝盖、手肘等处被打得稀烂,已经昏死过去,以为他死了,就把他扔掉了。巴利
Tassā veyyāvaccakarā ceva upaṭṭhākamanussā paṭibaddhā ca surāsoṇḍādayo jāṇukapparādīhi sukoṭṭitaṃ koṭṭitabhāvena mucchaṃ āpannattā matoti saññāya chaḍḍesuṃ.
这时,菩萨因尚有余寿,在微风轻轻吹拂之下,过了很久才恢复知觉。因此经文说“大士”等。“在屋前空地”:指房屋正门外开阔的露天场地。“倒卧”:即摆出倒卧的姿势;只因心中所求尚未达成,无法进门,便那样趴卧在地。“由于那相见为吉祥之事”:意思是,因有那位“见之即得吉祥”的女子之故。巴利
Atha bodhisatto āyuavasesassa atthitāya mandamande vāte vāyante cirena saññaṃ paṭilabhati. Tenāha ‘‘mahāpuriso’’tiādi. Gehaṅgaṇeti gehassa mahādvārato bahi vivaṭaṅgaṇe. Patitoti pātaṃ katvā icchitatthanipphattiṃ antaraṃ katvā anuppavesena nipanno. Diṭṭhamaṅgalikāyāti diṭṭhamaṅgalikākāraṇena.
名声,指财富与赞誉之声。月亮,指月轮,也就是月宫。在别人用过的屋子里,指在他人已经居住使用过的房子。在大厅里,指城中央的大会堂。巴利
Yasanti vibhavaṃ kittisaddañca. Candanti candamaṇḍalaṃ, candavimānanti attho. Ucchiṭṭhageheti parehi paribhuttagehe. Maṇḍapeti nagaramajjhe mahāmaṇḍape.
“乳根”是指乳房根部,也指系在脚上的摩尼珠的根部。“凡是口中传出的教法”意思是:从人们口中传出、诵出、流传开来的范围,也就是任何以言语为体的内容。“虚空广场”是指开阔空旷的场地。巴利
Khīramaṇimūlanti khīramūlaṃ, pādesu baddhamaṇimūlañca. Yāvatā vācuggatā pariyattīti yattako manussavacīdvārato uggato nikkhanto pavatto, yaṃkiñci vacīmayanti attho. Ākāsaṅgaṇeti vivaṭaṅgaṇe.
“恶衣者”是指像烟一样灰暗,意思是没涂油、没修饰。“卑劣者”是指志趣低下,意思是威德微弱。“裹住脖子”是指把衣披到喉颈处。“喂,你是谁”就是问:喂,你到底是什么人?巴利
Dummavāsīti dhūmo dhūsaro, anañjitāmaṇḍitoti adhippāyo. Otallakoti nihīnajjhāsayo, appānubhāvoti attho. Paṭimuñca kaṇṭheti yāva galavāṭakā pārupitvā. Ko re tuvanti are ko nāma tvaṃ.
准备好的:指已经备办妥当、用种种方式做成的食物。站着得到的团食:指走进人家村落,站在那里所得到的团食,也就是乞食的意思。将会得到:将会获得。萨波迦:大士按照自己的出身,如实表明自己是谁。巴利
Pakatanti paṭiyattaṃ nānappakārato abhisaṅkhataṃ. Uttiṭṭhapiṇḍanti antaragharaṃ upagamma ṭhatvā laddhabbapiṇḍaṃ, bhikkhāhāranti attho. Labhatanti lacchatu. Sapākoti mahāsatto jātivasena yathābhūtaṃ attānaṃ āvikaroti.
相信来世有利益存在,就是相信后世的利益确实存在。离开,就是走开。从这里,就是从这个地方。低劣,就是下等。巴利
Atthatthitaṃ saddahatoti samparāyikassa atthassa atthibhāvaṃ saddahantassa. Apehīti apagaccha. Ettoti imasmā ṭhānā. Jammāti lāmaka.
在水源充足、不干旱的田里,盼着能长出特别好的果实。凭着这样的信心去布施:就像乌云把低洼处和高地都灌满一样,不管对方有德还是无德,你都去布施;这样布施,也许就能令应受供养者欢喜。应受供养者,就是具备戒行等功德的人。巴利
Anūpakhetteti ajaṅgale udakasampanne khette phalavisesaṃ paccāsīsantā. Etāya saddhāya dadāhi dānanti ninnaṃ thalañca pūrento megho viya guṇavante nigguṇe ca dānaṃ dehi, evaṃ dento ca appeva ārādhaye dakkhiṇeyyeti. Dakkhiṇeyyeti sīlādiguṇasamannāgate.
“那些”是指那些婆罗门。“用竹片”是指用竹篾。巴利
Tānīti te brāhmaṇā. Veṇupadarenāti veḷuvilīvena.
就像用指甲挖山一样,是指像用自己的指甲去挖山一样。铁,就是黑铁。你压制,就是你能压服,好像用自己的身体去压服一样。巴利
Giriṃ nakhenakhaṇasīti pabbataṃ attano nakhena khaṇanto viya ahosi. Ayoti kālalohaṃ. Padahasīti abhibhavasi, attano sarīrena abhibhavanto viya ahosi.
被转动:指被动摇、翻转之后停住。以背:指用背的那一侧。伸展手臂、不能工作:指双臂不堪劳作,僵硬得像干枯的棍子一样,只能直直伸着,不能弯曲;眼白是因为转动时黑眼珠看不见了。巴利
Āvedhitanti calitaṃ viparivattetvā ṭhitaṃ. Piṭṭhitoti piṭṭhipassena. Bāhuṃ pasāreti akammaneyyanti akammakkhamaṃ bāhudvayaṃ thaddhaṃ sukkhadaṇḍakaṃ viya kevalaṃ pasāreti, na samiñjeti, setāni akkhīni parivattanena kaṇhamaṇḍalassa adissanato.
生命就是活着。巴利
Jīvitanti jīvanaṃ.
在虚空中,就是指在天空里。像路上的水流一样,就是指如同道路本身那样的水流。巴利
Vehāyasanti ākāse. Pathaddhunoti pathabhūtaddhuno viya.
连想都不生起:连“这些是良家子弟”这样一点点想都不生起。齿木残渣:因为咀嚼过齿木,所以这样说。它之所以落到他身上,是因为他对没有过失的人怀有嗔恨,而当时大士正处于最殊胜的福田。神通境界本来就是不可思议的,所以不该去想“为什么太阳不升起”。曙光不显现:是说在那片地方,曙光不出现,只有一片黑暗。巴利
Saññampi na karotīti ‘‘ime kulappasutā’’ti saññāmattampi na karoti. Dantakaṭṭhakucchiṭṭhakanti khāditadantakaṭṭhattā vuttaṃ. Etasseva upari patissati appaduṭṭhapadosabhāvato, mahāsattassa tadā ukkaṃsagatakhettabhāvato. Iddhivisayo nāma acinteyyo, tasmā kathaṃ sūriyassa uggantuṃ nādāsīti na cintetabbaṃ. Aruṇuggaṃ na paññāyatīti tasmiṃ padese aruṇapabhā na paññāyati, andhakāro eva hoti.
这难道是夜叉作怪、时节错乱吗?所谓“大慧”,是指广大智慧的安住基础。你们看看这地方人的脸吧:意思是说,你们看看这地方居民因为遭遇灾祸而满脸沮丧的样子。巴利
Yakkhāvaṭṭo nu kho ayaṃ kālavipariyāyo. Mahāpaññanti mahantānaṃ paññānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Janapadassa mukhaṃ passathāti imassa janapadavāsino janassa upaddavena maṅkubhūtaṃ mukhaṃ passatha.
关于他的这番话,就落在他自己头上。也就是说,那位以种种方式圆满修习诸巴拉密、遍修种种等至、具足戒与见之成就、相续清净的菩萨,安住于大悲之中;有人以粗恶语——即所谓诽谤圣者的业咒——对他发出诅咒。由于菩萨是殊胜的福田,又因为那人内心粗恶,这诅咒就成了现法受报的业。如果那人不向菩萨求原谅,到第七天就会自然成熟;但如果他向菩萨求了原谅,因为菩萨善巧方便的成就阻挡了它,这业就变成不感果的法,成为无效业。这就是诽谤圣者的恶业属于现法受报的法则,因此说“关于他的这番话,就落在他自己头上”等等。然而大士并没有让那诅咒落到他头上,而是用善巧方便使他解脱了。因此《行藏》中说:巴利
Etassa kathā etasseva upari patissatīti yāhi tena pāramitāparibhāvanasamiddhāhi nānāsamāpattivihāraparipūritāhi sīladiṭṭhisampadāhi susaṅkhatasantāne mahākaruṇādhivāse mahāsatte ariyūpavādakammaabhisapasaṅkhātā pharusavācā pavattitā, sā abhisapi tassa khettavisesabhāvato tassa ca ajjhāsayapharusatāya diṭṭhadhammavedaniyakammaṃ hutvā sace so mahāsattaṃ na khamāpeti, sattame divase vipaccanasabhāvaṃ jātaṃ, khamāpite pana mahāsatte payogasampatti paṭibāhitattā avipākadhammataṃ āpajjati ahosikammabhāvato. Ayañhi ariyūpavādapāpassa diṭṭhadhammavedaniyassa dhammatā, tena vuttaṃ ‘etassa kathā etasseva upari patissatī’tiādi. Mahāsatto pana taṃ tassa upari patituṃ na adāsi, upāyena mocesi. Tena vuttaṃ cariyāpiṭake (cariyā. 2.64) –
“ 那时他怒火中烧、心怀恶意,对我咒骂:
它就落在他的头上,我以方法将他解救了出来。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ so tadā maṃ abhisapi, kupito duṭṭhamānaso; Tasseva matthake nipati, yogena taṃ pamocayi’’nti.
菩萨在第七日阻止太阳升起这件事,就是这里所说的“方便”。正是凭借这个方便,连同国王在内的全体大众、城里的居民和乡村的百姓,才把那苦行者带到菩萨面前,请他原谅。那苦行者了解了菩萨的功德之后,就对菩萨生起了信心。至于把泥团放在他头上、又让它裂成七块,这是为了护住世人的心念。否则人们会想:“这些出家人自己都随着心念转,不能让心听从自己”,就会把大士也看成跟他们一样,那样对他们长久以来都是不利和痛苦的。所以经文才说“athassa”等等。巴利
Yañhi tattha sattame divase bodhisattena sūriyuggamananivāraṇaṃ kataṃ, ayamettha yogoti adhippeto. Yogena hi ubbaḷhā sarājikā parisā nagaravāsino negamā ceva jānapadā ca bodhisattassa santikaṃ tāpasaṃ ānetvā khamāpesuṃ. So ca bodhisattassa guṇe jānitvā tasmiṃ cittaṃ pasādesi. Yaṃ panassa matthake mattikāpiṇḍassa ṭhapanaṃ, tassa ca sattadhā phālanaṃ kataṃ, taṃ manussānaṃ cittānurakkhaṇatthaṃ. Aññathā hi – ‘‘ime pabbajitā samānā cittassa vase vattanti, na pana cittaṃ attano vase vattāpentī’’ti mahāsattampi tena sadisaṃ katvā gaṇheyyuṃ, tadassa tesaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyāti. Tenāha ‘‘athassā’’tiādi.
铁丸雨,就是铁球之雨。那时,有一肘那么大的,也有一肘半那么大的,都是锐利铁球,从四面八方纷纷落下,把人们的身体砸成一块一块的。泥浆雨,就是稀薄泥浆和泥块之雨。破坏,就是撞击。那地方正是中央森林。巴利
Lohakūṭavassanti ayaguḷavassaṃ. Tadā hi ratanamattāni diyaḍḍharatanamattānipi tikhiṇaṃsāni ayaguḷamaṇḍalāni ito cito ca nipatantā manussānaṃ sarīrāni khaṇḍakhaṇḍakāni akaṃsu. Kalalavassanti tanukakaddamapaṭalakaddamaṃ. Upahaccāti āghāṭetvā. Tadeva majjhāraññaṃ.
67 “审察而行”就是审察之后再做。为了说明:对那些因为两种原因而留在不能出离的教法里、又把自己当成弟子的人,应当怎样提拔和压制,所以说了“为什么”等话。巴利
67.Anuviccakāranti anuviccakaraṇaṃ. Kāraṇehi dvīhi aniyyānikasāsane ṭhitānaṃ attano sāvakattaṃ upagate paggahaniggahāni dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
69 “次第说法”,是指按照次第、一步一步应当宣说的法。那是什么法呢?就是布施论等。先说布施论。为什么呢?因为它在普通人中也广泛流传,是所有人都共通的,容易做到,而且是让人安立于戒的方便。要知道,一个具有舍离之戒的人,对所占有的东西没有黏着,所以能轻松地受持诸戒,并在其中稳稳安住。通过戒,布施者和受施者都得以清净——因此说了利益他人,接着又说不要伤害他人;说了应当做的事,接着又说不要做不应做的事;说了财富与名声成就的因,接着又说来世生存成就的因。正因如此,在布施论之后说戒论。而戒是轮回的所依。为了显示“这种生存成就就是它的果”,也为了显示“那些福行由布施和戒行所成、又因殊胜修行的差别而有所不同,它们能感得四天王天等天界中更殊胜、无量差别的财富与生存成就”,所以在戒论之后紧接着说生天论;也为了显示“天界被贪等烦恼染污,而圣道永远不被染污”,所以在生天论之后说圣道论。而在说圣道时,为了指出证得那圣道的方法,应当这样说:即使是属于天界的那些欲乐,更不用说其他一切欲了,都叫做有很多过患、无常、不坚固、会变坏的法——这就是欲的过患。它们是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、没有利益的——这就是欲的卑劣。一切生存状态都是烦恼的依托处——这就是其中的杂染。而完全脱离一切烦恼的是涅槃——也应当说在出离中的功德利益。这个意思,在这里由“iti”这个词来表示,应当这样理解。巴利
69.Anupubbiṃ kathanti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.75-76; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.12) anupubbiyā anupubbaṃ kathetabbakathaṃ, kā pana sā? Dānādikathā. Dānakathā tāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā sukarattā sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca āditova kathitā . Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggahaṇavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogayasasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā. Tañca sīlaṃ vaṭṭanissitaṃ, ayaṃ bhavasampatti tassa phalanti dassanatthaṃ, imehi ca dānasīlamayehi paṇītacariyabhedabhinnehi puññakiriyavatthūhi etā cātumahārājikādīsu paṇītatarādibhedabhinnā aparimeyyā bhogabhavasampattiyoti dassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ saggakathā. Svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho sabbadā anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggo, maggañca kathentena tadadhigamūpāyasandassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo. Hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso. Sabbaso kilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti ayamattho maggantīti ettha iti-saddena dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
“诸乐的因”:就是现世的乐、来世的乐,以及与涅槃相应的乐——这一切乐的因。世间无论哪种所谓的“受用之乐”,全都是以布施为因,这个道理很清楚。至于和禅那、观、道、果、涅槃相应的乐,布施也同样是它的亲依止缘。“成就的根本”:世间像地方王权、主宰之乐、七宝庄严的转轮王成就等,这些种种人间成就,以及生在四天王天等的天界成就,乃至其他各种成就,布施都是它们的根本因。“诸受用”:那些可意的色等对象,因为可以享受,所以得到“受用”这个名字;或者指依靠它们而生的享受之乐;布施是它们的依止,因为是稳固安立之处。“对遭遇不幸的人”:就是遭到灾祸的人。“是保护”:就是守护,从灾祸中保护的意思。“是窟宅”:对正被灾祸逼迫的人,是可以藏身的地方。“是归趣”:是应当去的地方。“是皈依”:是依靠之处。“是依所”:能防止堕落,是真正的依止。“是支持”:是可以攀附、可以握持的所缘。巴利
Sukhānaṃ nidānanti diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ samparāyikānaṃ nibbānasañhitānañcāti sabbesampi sukhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Yañhi kiñci loke bhogasukhaṃ nāma, taṃ sabbaṃ dānanidānanti pākaṭo ayamattho. Yaṃ pana jhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tassapi dānaṃ upanissayapaccayo hotiyeva. Sampattīnaṃ mūlanti yā imā loke padesarajjasirissariyasattaratanasamujjalacakkavattisampadāti evaṃpabhedā mānusikā sampattiyo, yā ca cātumahārājādigatā dibbā sampattiyo, yā vā panaññāpi sampattiyo, tāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ idaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ. Bhogānanti bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogo’’nti laddhanāmānaṃ manāpiyarūpādīnaṃ, tannissayānaṃ vā upabhogasukhānaṃ, patiṭṭhā niccalādhiṭṭhānatāya. Visamagatassāti byasanappattassa. Tāṇanti rakkhā tato paripālanato. Leṇanti byasanehi paripātiyamānassa olīyanapadeso. Gatīti gantabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Parāyaṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Avassayoti vinipatituṃ adento nissayo. Ārammaṇanti olubbhārammaṇaṃ.
就像用各种宝物做成的狮子座:它由一切宝物制成,具备七支,像大狮子座一样,极为珍贵,不会完全倒塌毁坏。又像大地:无论走到哪里,都能作为立足之处。就像虚弱的人站起来、站着时,所抓的绳子能给他支撑;同样,布施对众生获得成就和投生善趣来说,是投生和安住的助缘。因此说“以攀缘之义,像攀绳”。以出离苦之义:就是以出离恶趣之苦的意义。以真正安稳之义:就是对贪、悭等敌对伤害,能真正带来安稳的意义。以防护怖畏之义:就是防护贫穷怖畏的意义。以悭吝等垢秽:就是以悭吝、贪欲、嗔恨、嫉妒、邪见、疑惑等心中的垢秽。以不被染污之义:就是不被杂染。对于它们:就是对悭吝等垢秽。对于这些确实难以接近之义。以无怖畏之义:就是成为无怖畏的原因。因为作为施者、施主的人,现世尚且不从哪里生起怖畏,来世更不必说。以有大力量之义:就是有极大力量。施者、施主现世以资具之力而有力量,未来则以身力等而有力量。以被认可为最吉祥之义:就是被认同为“增长的原因”,也就是从衰败引向成就,抵达安稳之地。巴利
Ratanamayasīhāsanasadisanti sabbaratanamayasattaṅgamahāsīhāsanasadisaṃ, mahagghaṃ hutvā sabbaso vinipatituṃ appadānato. Mahāpathavisadisaṃ gatagataṭṭhāne patiṭṭhāsambhavato. Yathā dubbalassa purisassa ālambanarajju uttiṭṭhato tiṭṭhato ca upatthambho, evaṃ dānaṃ sattānaṃ sampattibhave upapattiyā ṭhitiyā ca paccayo hotīti āha ‘‘ālambanaṭṭhena ālambanarajjusadisa’’nti. Dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhenāti duggatidukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena. Samassāsanaṭṭhenāti lobhamacchariyādipaṭisattupaddavato sammadeva assāsanaṭṭhena. Bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhenāti dāliddiyabhayato paripālanaṭṭhena. Maccheramalādīhīti maccheralobhadosaissāmicchādiṭṭhivicikicchādi cittamalehi. Anupalittaṭṭhenāti anupakkiliṭṭhatāya. Tesanti maccheramalādīnaṃ. Etesaṃ eva durāsadaṭṭhena. Asantāsanaṭṭhenāti asantāsahetubhāvena. Yo hi dāyako dānapati, so sampatipi na kutoci santasati, pageva āyatiṃ. Balavantaṭṭhenāti mahābalavatāya. Dāyako hi dānapati sampati pakkhabalena balavā hoti, āyatiṃ pana kāyabalādīhi. Abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhenāti ‘‘vuḍḍhikāraṇa’’nti abhisammatabhāvena. Vipattito sampattiyā nayanaṃ khemantabhūmisampāpanaṃ.
现在,为了说明以大菩提行的身份也能展现布施的功德,所以说了“布施名为”等话。其中,“连自身都奉献出去”这一句,是用来说明:那些如实见到布施果报的大人,连自己的生命都能舍弃,那么,生来就有智慧的人,怎么会对身外之物产生执著呢?这是在给出教诫。接着,为了说明世间和出世间的一切殊胜成就,全都从布施产生,所以说了“因为布施”等话。其中,帝释天神、魔罗、梵天的成就是为自己好,而转轮王的成就既为自己好也为他人好,为了说明这个区别,所以把转轮王的成就放在后面说。这些是世间的成就;而“声闻巴拉密智”等,则是出世间的成就。为了说明其中优胜、更优胜、最优胜的层次,依次说了三种智。至于布施作为这些成就的助缘,前面已经说过了。由此也应该知道,布施对梵天的成就也是助缘。巴利
Idāni mahābodhicariyabhāvenapi dānaguṇaṃ dassetuṃ dānaṃ nāmetantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha attānaṃ niyyādentenāti etena dānaphalaṃ sammadeva passantā mahāpurisā attano jīvitampi pariccajanti, tasmā ko nāma viññujātiko bāhire vatthumhi saṅgaṃ kareyyāti ovādaṃ deti. Idāni yā lokiyā lokuttarā ca ukkaṃsagatā sampattiyo, tā sabbā dānatoyeva pavattantīti dassento ‘‘dānañhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sakkamārabrahmasampattiyo attahitāya eva, cakkavattisampatti pana attahitāya ca parahitāya cāti dassetuṃ sā tāsaṃ parato vuttā. Etā lokiyā, imā pana lokuttarāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sāvakapāramīñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tāsupi ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhatarukkaṭṭhatamameva dassetuṃ kamena ñāṇattayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ pana dānassa paccayabhāvo heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Eteneva tassa brahmasampattiyāpi paccayabhāvo dīpitoti veditabbo.
布施,就是以利益他人的心,或者以供养的心,把自己拥有的东西让给他人。所以,一个布施的人不可能去拿别人的东西,这是不可能的。因此说:“能行布施的人,就能受持戒。”没有什么装饰能比得上戒的装饰,因为戒能带来殊胜的美。也没有什么样的花能比得上戒花,这里的道理也是一样。没有什么香能比得上戒香。在这里应当引用“栴檀香、多伽罗香……”等偈颂(《法句经》55;《弥兰陀问经》4.1.1),以及“持戒已久的仙人们身上散发的香,随风飘去……”等《本生经》中的偈颂(Jā. 2.17.55)。因为戒对众生来说,既是饰物,也是庄严,又是涂香,还能带来悦意的容貌。因此说“以戒庄严……”等等。巴利
Dānañca nāma hitajjhāsayena, pūjāvasena vā attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanaṃ, tasmā dāyako purisapuggalo paresaṃ santakaṃ harissatīti aṭṭhānametanti āha – ‘‘dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkotī’’ti. Sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi sobhāvisesāvahattā sīlassa. Sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthīti ettha ‘‘candanaṃ tagaraṃ vāpī’’tiādikā (dha. pa. 55; mi. pa. 4.1.1) gāthā – ‘‘gandho isīnaṃ ciradikkhitānaṃ, kāyā cuto gacchati mālutenā’’tiādikā (jā. 2.17.55) jātakagāthāyo ca āharitvā vattabbā, sīlañhi sattānaṃ ābharaṇañceva alaṅkāro ca gandhavilepanañca dassanīyabhāvāvahañca. Tenāha ‘‘sīlālaṅkārena hī’’tiādi.
“能获得这样的天界”,这句话是针对以中等的意欲等受持戒律而说的。因此说,天王帝释——巴利
Ayaṃ saggo labbhatīti idaṃ majjhimehi chandādīhi samādānasīlaṃ sandhāyāha. Tenāha sakko devarājā –
“ 以低劣的梵行,会投生到刹帝利族中;
以中等程度的梵行能生到天界,以最殊胜的梵行则得到净化。”巴利
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 1.8.75; 2.22.429; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.75-76);
“可意的”就是快乐的。“可爱的”就是让人喜欢的。“悦意的”就是能让心增长的。为了说明那个天界具有可意等性质,才说了“这里常有嬉戏”等话。巴利
Iṭṭhoti sukho. Kantoti kamanīyo. Manāpoti manavaḍḍhanako. Taṃ pana tassa iṭṭhādibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘niccamettha kīḷā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“过患”是指由于无常等以及少乐等原因而败坏的状况,因为这样的状况不能让智者的心感到欢喜。或者说,“过患”就是导向极度悲惨的意思,也就是极其可怜的状态。对于如实观察的人来说,欲乐就是这样呈现出来的。“低劣性”是指被低劣的人所亲近、不被高尚的人所亲近,这就是卑下的性质。“受染污”是指具有逼迫性和热恼性。巴利
Dosoti aniccatādinā appassādādinā ca dūsitabhāvo, yato te viññūnaṃ cittaṃ nārādhenti . Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattetīti ādīnavo, paramakapaṇatā. Tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti. Lāmakabhāvoti aseṭṭhehi sevitabbo, seṭṭhehi na sevitabbo nihīnabhāvo. Saṃkilissananti vibādhakatā upatāpatā ca.
关于“出离的利益”:在这里,欲乐中有多少过患,从与它相对的一面来说,出离中就有同样多的利益。再者,他也以“这出离名为不狭窄、不染污,从诸欲中出离,从欲想中出离,从欲寻中出离,从欲热恼中出离,从嗔想中出离……”等(《相应义灯疏·大品》3.26;《长部疏》2.75-76)这样的方式,开示了出离的利益,并阐明、称赞了出家以及禅那等的功德。“堪任心”:因为在前面所说的教法中,不信等心的过失已经离去,所以通过成为后面教法的容器,心就堪任作业。不过在注释中,由于不信等是心的疾病,那时它们已经离去,所以说“无病心”。由于断除了邪见、慢等烦恼,心是柔软的。由于断除了欲贪等,心是无盖障的。由于在正确行道上有殊胜的喜与欢悦,心是踊跃的。其中,由于信圆满,心是清净的。“当世尊了知时”一句是连接关系。或者,“堪任心”:由于断除欲贪,是无病的心;“柔软心”:由于断除嗔恚,以慈心而不僵硬;“无盖障心”:由于断除掉举与恶作,散乱已经离去,因此心不被遮蔽;“踊跃心”:由于断除惛沉睡眠,以策励而不低沉;“清净心”:由于断除疑,对正确行道已胜解。应当如此理解这里其余诸词的含义。巴利
Nekkhamme ānisaṃsanti ettha yattakā kāmesu ādīnavā, tappaṭipakkhato tattakā nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Apica – ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpādasaññāyā’’tiādinā (sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.26; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.75-76) nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃse pakāsesi, pabbajjāya jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi. Kallacittanti heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacittaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yasmā assaddhiyādayo cittassa rogabhūtā , tadā te vigatā, tasmā āha ‘‘arogacitta’’nti. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamena muducittaṃ. Kāmacchandādivigamena vinīvaraṇacittaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogena udaggacittaṃ. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacittaṃ. Yadā bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vā kallacittanti kāmacchandavigamena arogacittaṃ. Muducittanti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akathinacittaṃ. Vinīvaraṇacittanti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacittaṃ. Udaggacittanti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahitavasena alīnacittaṃ. Pasannacittanti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacittanti evamettha sesapadānaṃ attho veditabbo.
通过“就像……”等比喻,说明了优波离断除烦恼染污以及成就圣道。“离黑垢”:就是去除了黑垢。“完全地”:就是好好地。“染料”:指蓝色、黄色等染料。“将接受”:就是会接受,会变得清净明亮。“就在那个座位上”:就是在同一个座位上。由此显示了他轻快观照、智慧锐利、修行容易且能快速获得神通。“离尘”:因为远离了会导向恶趣的贪等尘垢,所以叫离尘。“无垢”:由于彻底去除了邪见和疑的污秽,所以叫无垢。“三道”:指下面的三道。“为了说明它的生起方式”——为什么这样说呢?难道道智不是以无为法为所缘吗?这是针对这一问难而说“taṃ hī”等。其中“paṭivijjhantaṃ”是指以不迷惑的证悟而证悟。因此说“kiccavasena”。巴利
Seyyathāpītiādinā upamāvasena upālissa saṃkilesappahānaṃ ariyamagganipphādanañca dasseti. Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ. Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva. Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ. Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya. Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tissaṃ eva nisajjāyaṃ. Etenassa lahuvipassakatā tikkhapaññatā sukhapaṭipadākhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti. Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ. Anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamena vītamalaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ maggānanti heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ. Tassa uppattiākāradassananti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nanu maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘taṃ hī’’tiādi. Tattha paṭivijjhantanti asammohapaṭivedhavasena paṭivijjhantaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kiccavasenā’’ti.
这里,譬喻的对应关系是这样的:衣服好比心;衣服被外来的污垢弄脏,好比心被贪等烦恼弄脏;洗衣板好比次第说法;水好比信;而洗衣的功夫——把衣服浸在水里,用碱和牛粪灰等揉搓黑色污处——好比精进努力:先以信润湿浸透,再以念、定、慧把过失软化,然后通过听闻等方法净化心。依靠这种努力,衣服上的黑垢得以去除,好比依靠精进努力镇伏烦恼;染料好比圣道;衣服洗净后变得光亮,好比烦恼已被镇伏的心通过圣道得到净化。巴利
Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo, dhovanasilā viya anupubbīkathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udake temetvā ūsagomayachārikābharehi kāḷakapadese sammadditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithile katvā sutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho. Tena payogena vatthe kāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti.
说了“见法”之后,因为“见”除了智见之外还有别的含义,为了排除这些含义,所以说“得法”。而“得”除了智的成就之外也还有别的含义,为了进一步区分,所以说“知法”。但这种“知法”也可能只是对诸法的部分了知,为了显示无遗了知的状态,所以说“遍究法”。由此说明他对圣谛的完全觉悟。因为道智以一次现观完成遍知等作用,毫无遗漏地周遍通达四圣谛法,所以说:“他已见圣谛法,因此称为见法者。”度疑:已经度越了像可怕沙漠一样的十六事疑和八事疑,所以是度疑者。离疑惑:关于生命流转等,“是这样呢,还是那样呢”这类疑惑已经离去、断除,所以是离疑惑者。由于断除了能导致畏惧的恶法,在相反的戒等功德上善加安立,因此获得了自信、无畏和辩才。不依他:因为自己亲自现见了,所以不需要依靠他人来相信。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammoti vatvā dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññāpi vijjatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā dhammesu ekadesanāpi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenassa saccābhisambodhaṃyeva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāhantaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo’’ti. Tiṇṇā vicikicchāti sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā aṭṭhavatthukā ca tiṇṇā vicikicchā tiṇṇavicikicchā. Vigatakathaṃkathoti pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, kiṃ nu kho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā vigatā samucchinnā kathaṃkathā. Sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā tappaṭipakkhesu sīlādiguṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā vesārajjaṃ visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto. Attanā eva paccakkhato diṭṭhattā na tassa paro paccetabbo atthīti aparappaccayo.
71 所谓“智者”,就是指有智慧的人。巴利
71.Paṇḍitoti paññavā.
72 “那么,朋友!”他明明还在跟守门人说着话,即使听到对方说“就在这里”,也没能领会那句话的意思。为什么呢?因为他正沉浸在悲泣中。所以经文说“被强烈的忧伤所压倒”。巴利
72.Tena hi sammāti dovārikena saddhiṃ sallapatiyeva, ‘‘etthevā’’ti tena vuttavacanaṃ sutvāpi tassa atthaṃ asallakkhento. Kasmā? Paridevatāya. Tenāha ‘‘balavasokena abhibhūto’’ti.
73 他用那件上衣扫座位,又用同一件上衣围住腹部,心里想“别让我用身体碰到导师”,就隔出中间一段距离,用上衣裹住腹部,把它围好。“Dattapaññatta”等句里也是这样,这里的“datta”是愚人的同义词,所以经文说“你生来就是愚者”。因为侍者已经变了:原本是自己的侍者,如今不再侍奉了。巴利
73.Tenevāti yena uttarāsaṅgena āsanaṃ sammajjati, teneva udare parikkhipanto ‘‘māhaṃ satthāraṃ mama sarīrena phusi’’nti antaraṃ karonto uttarāsaṅgena taṃ udare parikkhipanto pariggahetvā. ‘‘Dattapaññatta’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.171) viya datta-saddo ettha bālapariyāyoti āha ‘‘jaḷosi jāto’’ti. Upaṭṭhākassa aññathābhāvenāti pubbe attano upaṭṭhākassa idāni anupaṭṭhākabhāvena.
75 没有识知能力的东西,就是用树枝等做成的。极其厚重、涂上黄色涂料的,是一种染料。涂得特别厚、呈黄色或橘红色等的涂料和染料。揉搓之后产生一层像皮肤一样的表面,那层表面能吸收染料。反复涂抹,所以叫“无毛的”。变成一块一块、破碎的状态。“能接受染色”就是可以被染色的。因此说“只产生贪染”。“追问”就是质问。“考察”就是分析。对尼干陀的教义进行考察、寻找它的实质,就像舂打谷壳想找出米粒,或者在芭蕉树里想找出坚实部分一样。正因为这样考察它,它就成了空洞虚无的。一切佛语都不离四圣谛,而对它进行考察时,只会让有智慧的人生起喜悦和满足,不会让人厌倦,因为它没有可被驳倒的地方,所以说“四圣谛之语”等等。无论从蕴的角度,还是从界、处等任何一个角度深入佛语,它都只会显得甚深,因为那正是甚深智慧者的境界。在这里,如果有聪明、敏锐、善于破斥他人主张的智者,竭尽全力发起追问,他的问难连一根毛尖那么一点也动摇不了它。即使再长时间地反复推敲,它也能经得起琢磨,如来的教说就是这样善说,所以说“经得起追问,经得起琢磨”。巴利
75.Aviññāṇakaṃ dārusākhādimayaṃ. Bahalabahalaṃ pītāvalepanaṃ raṅgajātanti ativiya bahalaṃ pītavaṇṇamañjiṭṭhaādiavalepanarajanaṃ. Ghaṭṭetvā uppāditacchaviṃ, yā raṅgaṃ pivati. Nillomatanti punappunaṃ anulimpanena. Khaṇḍakhaṇḍitanti khaṇḍakhaṇḍitabhāvaṃ. Raṅgakkhamo rajaniyo. Tenāha ‘‘rāgamattaṃ janetī’’ti. Anuyoganti codanaṃ. Vīmaṃsanti vicāraṇaṃ. Thuse koṭṭetvā taṇḍulapariyesanaṃ viya kadaliyaṃ sārapariyesanaṃ viya ca nigaṇṭhavāde sāravīmaṃsanaṃ. Tato eva ca taṃ vīmaṃsanto rittako tucchakova hotīti. Sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ catusaccavinimuttaṃ natthi, tañca vīmaṃsiyamānaṃ viññūnaṃ pītisomanassameva janeti, atappakañca asecanābhāvenāti āha ‘‘catusaccakathā hī’’tiādi. Yathā yathāti yadi khandhamukhena yadi dhātāyatanādīsu aññataramukhena buddhavacanaṃ ogāhissati, tathā tathā gambhīrañāṇānaṃyeva gocarabhāvato gambhīrameva hoti. Yo cettha paṇḍito nipuṇo kataparappavādo paṇidhāya sabbathāmena codanaṃ ārambhati tassa codanā kesaggamattampi cāletuṃ na sakkoti. Puna sucirampi kālaṃ vicārentesupi vimaddakkhamato, evaṃ tathāgatavādo svākhyātabhāvatoti āha ‘‘anuyogakkhamo vimajjanakkhamo cā’’ti.
76 76. 以遍知诸境而烧毁、净化敌对之法,所以叫智者;而这位智者的智者状态,就是彻底摧毁一切迷乱,因此说“那种慧……具足这种智慧的人”。已断尽心荒芜者,是指已经彻底断除一切心荒芜的人;因为战胜了烦恼魔和死魔,行蕴魔也就随之被战胜了,所以这里只取前两种魔。“īgha”这个词是苦的同义词,因此说“无忧苦者”。其中,证得有余涅槃时,因为断尽烦恼而无苦;证得无余涅槃时,因为不再有异熟苦而无苦。由于贪染、嗔害、迷乱等种种方式而恼害,所以叫毒;毒就是贪等烦恼,因此说“离毒者——已经度过、超越贪等烦恼毒而安住的人”。巴利
76. Visayapariññāṇena dahati paṭipakkhe sodhetīti dhīro, svāyamassa dhīrabhāvo sabbaso sammohaviddhaṃsanatāyāti āha – ‘‘yā paññā…pe… tena samannāgatassā’’ti. Pabhinnakhīlassāti samucchinnasabbacetokhīlassa, kilesamaccumāravijayeneva abhisaṅkhārakhandhamārā jitāva hontīti tesaṃ dvinnaṃ idha aggahaṇaṃ. Īgha-saddo dukkhapariyāyoti āha ‘‘niddukkhassā’’ti. Tattha saupādisesanibbānappattiyā kilesena niddukkhatā, anupādisesanibbānappattiyā vipākadukkhena niddukkhatā. Rajjanadussanamuyhanādivasena vividhaṃ īsanato vīsaṃ, vīsameva vesaṃ, rāgādīti āha – ‘‘vesantarassāti rāgādivīsaṃ taritvā vitaritvā ṭhitassā’’ti.
“兜率天子”是指以悲悯的方式而满足的这位天子。若这样理解,那么“喜悦者”这一说法就又重复了。“人”是指:世尊最初投生为人时,以已说和将说的种种功德,超越了包括天神在内的世间而安住,以此显示世尊实在希有。他把包括天神在内的世间从轮回中引导出来,令其到达涅槃之乐,所以称为“nara”(人),意思是“导师”,因此说这是重复。先说了“人”,又说“nara”,这是词句的重复。若从义理上另作区分,那么每一首偈颂的十种功德就不够用、不能圆满,这就是其含义。巴利
Tusitassāti karuṇāyanavasena tusiyā itassa saṃvattassa. Evaṃ sati ‘‘muditassā’’ti idaṃ punaruttameva hoti. Manujassāti paṭhamāya jātiyā bhagavā manussajātiyo hutvā vuttānaṃ vakkhamānānañca vasena sadevakaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito acchariyo bhagavāti dasseti. Sadevakaṃ lokaṃ saṃsārato nibbānasukhaṃ narati neti pāpetīti naro, nāyakoti attho, tassa narassa, tenāha ‘‘punarutta’’nti. ‘‘Manujassā’’ti vatvā ‘‘narassā’’ti punaruttaṃ padaṃ. Atthavasena aññathā vuccamāne ekekagāthāya dasaguṇā nappahonti, na pūrentīti attho.
律就是调伏,律本身就是应当被调伏者,所以说“众生的引导者”。令智者欢喜,或者散发、引发喜悦,所以叫“令人欢喜”;这种令人欢喜的性质就是善巧,因此说“具有清净法的人”。所谓“光辉者”,就是以智慧之光使自身变得明亮的人。所谓“无著者”,就是在八种大众中,或在包括天神在内的整个世间中,因为不执取、彻底舍离而超脱的人。所谓“具有甚深功德者”,就是他人用智慧无法测度、因而功德甚深的人。因此世尊说:“比丘们,还有别的甚深之法……”等等。或者,是以圣者的沉默而达到牟尼境界的人。所谓“住于法者”,就是稳稳安住于法身的人。所谓“防护者”,就是因为身的行为等本来无需守护,所以本性就是防护的人。巴利
Vinetīti vinayo, vinayo eva veneyikoti āha ‘‘sattānaṃ vināyakassā’’ti. Viññūnaṃ ruciṃ rāti, īretīti vā ruciro, svāyamassa rucirabhāvo kusalatāyāti āha ‘‘sucidhammassā’’ti. Pabhāsakassāti ñāṇālokena pabhassarabhāvakarassa. Nissaṅgassāti aṭṭhasupi parisāsu, sadeve vā sabbasmiṃ loke aggaṇhāpanapariccāgena nissaṭassa. Gambhīraguṇassāti paresaṃ ñāṇena appatiṭṭhabhāvā gambhīraguṇassa. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.28). Ariyāya vā tuṇhībhāvena monappattassa. Dhamme ṭhitassāti dhammakāye suppatiṭṭhitassa. Saṃvutattassāti arakkhiyakāyasamācārāditāya saṃvutasabhāvassa.
“不造恶”等四种原因,是就边地坐卧处而言的,也就是僻静远离的坐卧处。能回应一切外道论说的智慧,即能驳倒一切外道主张的智慧。所谓“牟那”,指的就是智慧,因为它能从一切方面断除烦恼。巴利
Āguṃ na karotītiādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi, pantasenāsanassāti vivittasenāsanassa. Paṭimantanapaññāyāti sabbaparappavādānaṃ viparāvattamantanapaññāya. Monaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ sabbato kilesānaṃ nidhunanato.
“第七仙人”:在一切仙人中最尊贵、最贤善的那位。“得最胜者”:证得最上、最殊胜的正等正觉的人。“文字等”:文字、词、音节、形态、语法解说、宣说、阐明、开显、分别、显了——这些就是表音与表义的语句。把它们结合起来,随顺所教化者的意乐而宣说、讲说,所以称为“句者”。“puri”这个词和“pubbe”(先前)意思相同,因此说“富兰陀罗”:指最先布施法施的人。世尊能忍受难忍之事,所以说“有能力者”。因此经中说:“如来、佛陀,能忍难忍”(《如是语》38)。“得彼者”:毫无遗漏地证得那些功德的人。详细解说杂染法与清净法,所以是“记说”,记说就是“广说者”。“经典之句”:被编入经典而确立的语句。巴利
Isisattamassāti sabbaisīsu jeṭṭhassa sādhutamassa. Seṭṭhappattassāti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ sammāsambodhiṃ pattassa. Akkharādīnīti akkharapadabyañjanākāra-niruttiniddesa-saṃkāsanapakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajanuttānīkaraṇānīti byañjanatthapadāni. Samodhānetvā vineyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pakāsanato kathanato padakassa. Puri-saddo ‘‘pubbe’’ti iminā samānatthoti āha – ‘‘purindadassāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ dhammadānadāyakassā’’ti. Bhagavā asayhaṃ sahituṃ samatthoti āha ‘‘samatthassā’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘tathāgataṃ buddhamasayhasāhina’’nti (itivu. 38). Te pattassāti te guṇe anavasesato pattassa. Vitthāretvā saṃkilesavodānadhammaṃ byākarotīti byākaraṇo, byākaraṇo eva veyyākaraṇo. Tantipadanti tantiṃ āropetvā ṭhapitaṃ padaṃ.
不被渴爱之缚束缚,也不被一切烦恼之缚束缚。大智慧:指具有大威力的慧,或指所缘广大的慧。因为世尊的一切慧都具有大威力,在各自的领域中也都是广大的;若从“一即一切”的角度说,无余涵盖一切的大范围,就是一切知性。以显示威力的意义:为了向世间显示他自己那不可思议、不可测量的威力。夜叉:也可指应受世间供养者。这位近事男,就像近事女库竹德拉一样,是证得有学无碍解的人,所以说他“以入流道便获得了无碍解”。讲说断烦恼的容色:以断烦恼为所缘、为相,而宣说容色。巴利
Taṇhābandhanena sabbena vā kilesabandhanena abaddhassa. Mahāpaññāyāti mahānubhāvāya paññāya, mahāvisayāya vā paññāya. Sabbā hi bhagavato paññā mahānubhāvā, yathāsakaṃ visaye mahāvisayā ca ekādivasena anavasesato mahāvisayā nāma sabbaññutāva. Ānubhāvadassanaṭṭhenāti acchariyācinteyyāparimeyyassa attano ānubhāvassa lokassa dassanaṭṭhena . Yakkhassāti vā lokena pūjanīyassa . Ayaṃ upāsako khujjuttarā viya upāsikā sekhapaṭisambhidāppattoti āha ‘‘sotāpattimaggeneva paṭisambhidā āgatā’’ti. Kilesappahānavaṇṇaṃ kathentoti kilesappahānaṃ visayaṃ nimittaṃ katvā vaṇṇaṃ kathento.
77 “积聚”是指堆在一起、结成一团的意思。“这些众生”是指那些不断流转的任何众生。“只盘算自己的利益”,是因为渴爱还没有断尽,所以只想着自己的好处。就像人哀悼死去的亲属时,其实也是围绕着那些亲属本应为自己带来的利益在哀伤。“变热了”,是因为心受到强烈的灼烧,体内心脏所在的地方变得滚烫,就像被金合欢炭火烤过一样,所以说“血都融化了”。“只有一钵的量”,就是刚好装满一钵的分量。因为促成现观的四谛开示是以简略的方式说出来的,所以他说:“为利根者所说的法已经圆满结束了。”巴利
77.Sampiṇḍitāti sannicitā, ganthitāti attho. Ime sattāti yaṃ yadeva paribbhamantā sattā. Attanova cintayantīti avītataṇhatāya sakaṃyeva payojanaṃ cintenti. Tathā hi mate ñātake anusocantāpi tehi sādhetabbassa attano payojanasseva vasena anusocanti. Uṇhaṃ ahosīti balavatā cittassa santāpena santattaṃ abbhantaraṃ hadayaṭṭhānaṃ khadiraṅgārasantāpitaṃ viya uṇhaṃ ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘lohitaṃ vilīyitthā’’ti. Pattamattanti ekapattapūramattaṃ. Abhisamayasādhikāya catusaccadesanāya saṅkhepeneva desitattā āha – ‘ugghaṭitaññupuggalassa vasena dhammadesanā pariniṭṭhitā’’ti.
第7节 《狗戒者经》的注释巴利
7. Kukkuravatikasuttavaṇṇanā
78 78. “在拘利耶人中”:这里的巴利语用的是复数形式。为什么解释成“在名叫这个名称的地方”呢?所以他说“因为这位……”等等。“没有限定”:没有限定说“在某座名叫某某的精舍里”。“只在坐卧处”:只在住处,不是在树下等地方。以穿牛的方式、抓取食物等应当受持的意义,叫做牛戒;致力于这个的人就是持牛戒者。因此他说“已受持牛戒者”。通晓吠陀的人针对这一点说:“走着吃,站着尿,用嘴喝水,抖身子,割草”等等。这位裸形者:以裸形出家而成为裸形者;至于前面那位持牛戒者,此处应按照所述方式,解释为持狗戒者。卷曲手足蹲踞:即卷曲双手双足。也说“作蹲踞者”。行:成就,趣,因此说:“‘何趣’即‘何成就’”。因为成就的终结就是异熟法的生起。由于所作积集的业而到达此处,所以叫来世,即他世。在那里询问他的成就,因此说:“在来世投生何处”。受持狗戒:即受持狗的状态,即“从今天起我是狗”这样决意狗的状态。巴利
78.Koliyesūti bahuvacanavasenāyaṃ pāḷi āgatā. Evaṃnāmake janapadeti atthavacanaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Na niyamitoti ‘‘asukamhi nāma vihāre’’ti na niyametvā vutto. Senāsaneyevāti āvāseyeva, na rukkhamūlādike. Vesakiriyā ghāsaggahaṇādinā samādātabbaṭṭhena govataṃ, tasmiṃ niyutto govatiko. Tenāha ‘‘samādinnagovato’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāyāhu vedavedino – ‘‘gacchaṃ bhakkheti, tiṭṭhaṃ mutteti, upāhā udakaṃ dhūpeti, tiṇāni chindatī’’tiādi. Ayaṃ aceloti acelakapabbajjāvasena acelo, purimo pana govatiko kukkuravatikoti ettha vuttanayānusārena attho vattabbo. Palikuṇṭhitvāti ubho hatthe ubho pāde ca samiñjitvā. ‘‘Ukkuṭiko hutvā’’tipi vadanti. Gamanaṃ nipphajjanaṃ gatīti āha – ‘‘kāgatīti kā nipphattī’’ti. Nipphattipariyosānā hi vipākadhammappavatti. Katūpacitakammavasena abhisampareti etthāti abhisamparāyo, paraloko. Tatthassa ca nipphattiṃ pucchatīti āha – ‘‘abhisamparāyamhi kattha nibbattī’’ti. Kukkuravatasamādānanti kukkurabhāvasamādānaṃ, ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya ahaṃ kukkuro’’ti kukkurabhāvādhiṭṭhānaṃ.
79 所谓“圆满”,是指狗的一切形态特征都具足,用那些特征来圆满。因此说“无缺”。“不相杂”,是指不与那些特征混杂。“狗的行为”,是指狗走路的样子等行为,这里说的是决意成为狗的心。因为要这样那样地装扮,所以叫“威仪”,也就是行为的表现方式。这里指的是行走等,所以说“狗的行走方式”等等。“以行为”,是指以狗的戒行。“以戒的受持”,是指对狗戒的决意。狗的威仪等本身就是难行的苦行。由此,以颠倒趣向的方式,那种见解就生起了。这个行狗戒的人没有别的趣向,他否定别的趣向,而别的趣向根本不可能存在。“卧倒”,是指以守护戒行等的方式而成就的。就像及物动词词根构成的词,因为意义不同而变成不及物,比如“人醒了”“莲池开了”;同样,因为意义不同,不及物的也会变成及物。为了说明这一点,他说“我不悲泣,我不恸悼”等等。而“恸悼”这个词也以带宾语的方式使用,比如在“悲悼往事”等说法中。这是这里的用法,通过这个,他表示在这首偈颂中,指的是恸悼和悲泣。巴利
79.Paripuṇṇanti yattakā kukkuravikārā, tehi paripuṇṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anūna’’nti. Abbokiṇṇanti tehi avomissaṃ. Kukkurācāranti kukkurānaṃ gamanākārotiādiācārena kukkurabhāvādhiṭṭhānacittamāha. Tathā tathā ākappetabbato ākappo, pavattiākāro. So panettha gamanādikoti āha ‘‘kukkurānaṃ gamanākāro’’tiādi. Ācārenāti kukkurasīlācārena. Vatasamādānenāti kukkuravatādhiṭṭhānena. Kukkuracariyādiyeva dukkaratapacaraṇaṃ. Tena gativipariyesākārena pavattā laddhi. Assa kukkuravatikassa aññā gati natthīti itaragatiṃ paṭikkhipati, itarāsaṃ pana sambhavo eva natthīti. Nipajjamānanti vatasīlādīnaṃ saṃgopanavasena sijjhamānaṃ. Yathā sakammakadhātusaddā atthavisesavasena akammakā honti ‘‘vibuddho puriso vibuddho kamalasaṇḍo’’ti, evaṃ atthavisesavasena akammakāpi sakammakā hontīti dassento ‘‘na paridevāmi na anutthunāmī’’tiādimāha. Anutthunasaddo ca sakammakavasena payujjati ‘‘purāṇāni anutthuna’’ntiādīsu. Ayañcettha payogoti iminā gāthāyañca anutthunanarodanaṃ adhippetanti dasseti.
80 就像前面所说的那样,这里“牛戒”就是指受持牛戒。“牛行”是指牛的行为方式。“牛心”是指心里生起这样的念头:“从今天开始,我要做牛该做的事。”这句话点出的就是这个意思。至于牛威仪方面还该说的其余内容,通过“和说狗威仪时所说的一样”这句话就已经说明了;其中特别的地方,也正如“然而在那里……”等文所说的那样。而这里本来该说的内容,也还是按照讲狗戒等处的说法来讲。巴利
80.Vuttanayenevāti iminā govatanti govatasamādānaṃ. Gosīlanti gavācāraṃ. Gocittanti ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya gohi kātabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti uppannacittanti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Gvākappe pana vattabbaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘kukkurākappe vuttasadisamevā’’ti imināva atidiṭṭhaṃ, visiṭṭhañca yathā pana tatthātiādinā vuttameva. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ kukkuravatādīsu vuttanayameva.
81 “以个别业行的方式”是指:因为有机会造作某一种不善业或善业的缘故。“这些”是指那些持牛戒的人和持狗戒的人。“业行”是指通过修习牛戒等方式而现起的所作所为。“将会变得清楚”的意思是:在四种业当中,哪一种业属于哪一种,这一点将会变得清楚。巴利
81.Ekaccakammakiriyāvasenāti ekaccassa akusalakammassa kusalakammassa karaṇappasaṅgena. Imesanti govatikakukkuravatikānaṃ. Kiriyāti govatabhāvanādivasena pavattā kiriyā. Pākaṭā bhavissatīti ‘‘imasmiṃ kammacatukke idaṃ nāma kammaṃ bhajatī’’ti pākaṭā bhavissati.
“黑的”:指污秽,会让心变得没有光泽,这是它的意思。不过在这里,特指业道已经完成,所以说“十不善业道”。“黑”:因为它是黑生类的因,所以叫黑。因此说“黑果”。投生到恶趣,以及在人间遭遇不幸,就是黑果;正如黑暗状态所说的那样。不过,按单一投生处来说,则说“由于投生到恶趣”,意思是导致投生到恶趣。
“白的”:指洁白,会让心变得有光泽,这是它的意思;或者因为它是白生类的因,所以叫白。因此说“白果”。投生到善趣,以及在人间享受幸福,就是白果;正如光明状态所说的那样。不过,按单一投生处来说,则说“由于投生到善趣”,意思是导致投生到善趣。
“杂业”:有时黑,有时白,如此以混合的方式所造之业。说了“苦乐异熟”之后,为了显示苦乐的运作方式,所以说“杂业……”等。业的黑白名称,是因为它是黑白的生类之因;由于不导向涅槃,所以此处也不接受与那两者分离的、能导致业尽的业的白的说法,因此说“两者……乃至……非白”。其中,“两者之果”:如其所被领受的果。属于福有的异熟,在此被称为“白异熟”,而不是完全清净的。巴利
Kāḷakanti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.232) malīnaṃ, cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇanti attho. Taṃ panettha kammapathasampattameva adhippetanti āha ‘‘dasaakusalakammapatha’’nti. Kaṇhanti kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kaṇhavipāka’’nti. Apāyūpapatti manussesu ca dobhaggiyaṃ kaṇhavipāko, yathā tamabhāvo vutto, ekattaniddesena pana ‘‘apāye nibbattanato’’ti vuttaṃ, nibbattāpanatoti attho. Sukkanti odātaṃ, cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇanti attho, sukkābhijātihetuto vā sukkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukkavipāka’’nti. Saggūpapatti manussaloke sobhaggiyañca sukkavipāko, yathā ca jotibhāvo vutto, ekattaniddesena pana ‘‘sagge nibbattanato’’ti vuttaṃ, nibbattāpanatoti attho, vomissakakammanti kālena kaṇhaṃ, kālena sukkanti evaṃ missakavasena katakammaṃ. ‘‘Sukhadukkhavipāka’’nti vatvā sukhadukkhānaṃ pavattiākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘missakakammañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kammassa kaṇhasukkasamaññā kaṇhasukkābhijātihetutāyāti, apaccayagāmitāya tadubhayavinimuttassa kammakkhayakarakammassa idha sukkapariyāyopi na icchitoti āha – ‘‘ubhaya…pe… asukkanti vutta’’nti. Tattha ubhayavipākassāti yathādhigatassa vipākassa. Sampattibhavapariyāpanno hi vipāko idha ‘‘sukkavipāko’’ti adhippeto, na accantaparisuddho.
“有苦”:是指与自身所生起的苦在一起,也就是有苦、能导致苦的意思。为了让人理解,这里也成立了上文所说的含义:“在这部经里,思是主导;在《优波离经》里,业是主导。”“已造作”:就是已累积。而它由于众缘和合而成就,就像收集、团拢一样,所以说“已收集、已团拢,就是这个意思”。“有苦的世间”:指的是恶趣世间。“异熟触”:是以触为首,说明在那里异熟的生起。“因已作之业”:是从能令生的业来说,从自己所作、所累积的业来说。“如实”:就是如它本来的样子。“以与业同类的方式”:就是以与业相似的方式。“有再生”:指无足等不同种类的再生。所谓随业而说,就是那些仅由一业而生的无足等类别,被说成如同随业而说的一样。而再生其实是由异熟而来的,当异熟存在时,那些再生的差别就一定存在。如果是这样,那为什么说“以那业而再生”,是把再生说成以业为因呢?所以说“然而,因为……”等。以哪种业异熟而再生,就是说以哪种业异熟正在成熟,这个有情被称为已生起。那业异熟的触,就是那种种业的异熟所成的触。领受由业应给的遗产、那业的果报,所以触是业的继承者;业的继承性就是业果的继承,因此说“业的继承者”。所以他说“业就是他们的遗产、他们的所有”。巴利
Sadukkhanti attanā uppādetabbena dukkhena sadukkhaṃ, dukkhasaṃvattanikanti attho. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sutte cetanā dhuraṃ, upālisutte (ma. ni. 2.56) kamma’’nti heṭṭhā vuttampi atthaṃ idha sādhayati vijānanatthaṃ. Abhisaṅkharitvāti āyūhitvā. Taṃ pana paccayasamavāyasiddhito saṃkaḍḍhanaṃ piṇḍanaṃ viya hotīti āha – ‘‘saṅkaḍḍhitvā, piṇḍaṃ katvāti attho’’ti, sadukkhaṃ lokanti apāyalokamāha. Vipākaphassāti phassasīsena tattha vipākapavattamāha. Bhūtakammatoti nibbattakammato attanā katūpacitakammato. Yathābhūtanti yādisaṃ. Kammasabhāgavasenāti kammasarikkhakavasena. Upapatti hotīti apadādibhedā upapatti. Kammena viya vuttāti yaṃ karoti, tena upapajjatīti ekakammeneva jāyamānā viya vuttā apadādibhedā. Upapatti ca nāma vipākena hoti vipāke sambhavante ekaṃsena te upapattivisesā sambhavanti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘tena upapajjatī’’ti upapattikammahetukā vuttāti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Yena kammavipākena nibbattoti yena kammavipākena vipaccamānena ayaṃ satto nibbattoti vuccati. Taṃkammavipākaphassāti tassa tassa kammassa vipākabhūtā phassā. Kammena dātabbaṃ dāyaṃ tabbipākaṃ ādiyantīti kammadāyādā, phassā. Kammassa dāyajjatā kammaphalassa dāyajjaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kammadāyajjā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘kammameva nesaṃ dāyajjaṃ santaka’’nti.
三种下禅那的思,这是为了成立:无恼害受是一向只生起快乐的因。如果真是这样,那么像上面所说的禅那思,作为一向只生起快乐的因,倒还说得过去。可是欲界的思又怎么样呢?欲界的善思并没有那种性质,它怎么能、以什么方式被称为无恼害的意行呢?对方这样提出责难。为了说明并不是所有欲界善思都被这样认定,只有某些随顺禅那思的思才是,所以他说:在遍作遍修习的时候可以得到。在这里,应当取遍修习的思,它是近行禅那的助成者。因此,欲界思与初禅那思相连接,而遍作的思有时也被这样取。因为以遍作等方式生起的修所成欲界善思,由于接近初禅那,所以被这样说。第四禅那思与第三禅那思相连接,这是因为:在单一身、单一想的有情居处中,与它相似的舍,在这些情况下也与乐相似——因为它具有如此寂静的性质,并且与智相应。不过有些人举例说,第四禅那思的随顺者在遍作时、遍禅那时、遍修习时可以得到,因此说它与第三禅那思接近、相连接。这只是他们个人的看法,应当依照前面所说的方式理解这些思的连接。以两者混合的方式,是指善与不善两种行以及乐与苦混合的方式。至于“化生饿鬼”等,这是就多数情况而说的,其他堕入恶趣的众生有时也会有苦。巴利
Tisso ca heṭṭhimajjhānacetanāti idaṃ abyābajjhavedanaṃ vediyanaekantasukhuppattiyā hetubhāvasādhanaṃ. Yadi evaṃ yathāvuttā jhānacetanā tāva hotu ekantasukhuppattihetubhāvato. Kāmāvacarā kintīti kāmāvacarā pana kusalacetanā taṃsabhāvābhāvato kinti kena pakārena abyābajjhamanosaṅkhāro nāma jātoti codeti, itaro pana na sabbā kāmāvacarakusalacetanā tathā gahitā, atha kho ekaccā jhānacetanānukūlāti dassento ‘‘kasiṇasajjanakāle kasiṇāsevanakāle labbhantī’’ti āha. Tattha kasiṇāsevanacetanā gahetabbā, sā upacārajjhānassa sādhikā. Tena kāmāvacaracetanā paṭhamajjhānacetanāya ghaṭitāti kasiṇasajjanacetanāpi kadāci tādisā hotīti gahitā. Parikammādivasena hi pavattā bhāvanāmayā kāmāvacarakusalacetanā paṭhamajjhānassa āsannatāya vuttā. Catutthajjhānacetanā tatiyajjhānacetanāya ghaṭitāti idaṃ ekattakāyaekattasaññīsattāvāsavatāya taṃsarikkhakā upekkhāpi īdisesu ṭhānesu sukhasarikkhatā, evaṃ santasabhāvatā ñāṇasahitatā ca. Keci pana catutthajjhānacetanānuguṇāti nidassentā kasiṇasajjanakāle kasiṇajjhānakāle kasiṇāsevanakāle labbhatīti tatiyajjhānacetanāya āsannaghaṭitatā vuttāti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ, vuttanayeneva tāsaṃ ghaṭitatā veditabbā. Ubhayamissakavasenāti ubhayesaṃ kusalākusalasaṅkhārānaṃ sukhadukkhānañca missakabhāvavasena. Vemānikapetānanti idaṃ bāhullato vuttaṃ, itaresampi vinipātikānaṃ kālena dukkhaṃ hotiyeva.
为了断除它,也就是为了让前面所说的那种业,达到不再生起的法性。所谓“那种思”,是指趣向损减的思。说到“达到业”:若称之为“白业”,那么除了道思之外,确实没有别的法更为皎洁,因为它究竟清净。“不黑不白”等语被引述处,否定其白性的依据,与上文所说的方法相同。因此说“然而,达到这四种业……”等等。巴利
Tassapahānāyāti tassa yathāvuttassa kammassa anuppattidhammatāpādanāya. Yā cetanāti yā apacayagāminicetanā. Kammaṃ patvāti sukhakammanti vuccamāne maggacetanāya añño paṇḍarataro dhammo nāma natthi accantapārisuddhibhāvato. Akaṇhā asukkāti āgatāti ettha sukkabhāvapaṭikkhepakāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pana kammacatukkaṃ patvā’’tiādi.
82 在“非出离分”中:指裸形出家与行狗戒。“结合”:意思是正理法之修行。“以那种方式”:就是世尊所制定的那种外道别住。“受持那种外道别住之后”:这里是这样的连接。就像用磨石擦拭黄金,或者像用手揉捏陶器的坯体。巴利
82.Aniyyānikapakkheti aceḷakapabbajjāya kukkuravate ca. Yogeti ñāyadhammapaṭipattiyanti attho. Yonenāti yo titthiyaparivāso tena bhagavatā paññatto. Yaṃ titthiyaparivāsaṃ samādiyitvāti ayamettha yojanā. Ghaṃsitvā suvaṇṇaṃ viya nighaṃsoppale. Koṭṭetvā hatthena viya kulālabhājanaṃ.
远离就是独处、单独一人。心已投向就是心被遣送向涅槃。他确实证得了那无上的梵行终尽……而住:就以这阿拉汉果为顶点,开示到此便告结束。而对尊者军士修行实践的称扬,其主旨正是为了说明他直接证入阿拉汉果的情形,也就是“然而,有某一位……”等这段话。他们之所以被归在其中,正是因为他们证得了阿拉汉果。其余部分都很容易理解。巴利
Vūpakaṭṭhoti vivitto ekībhūto. Pesitattoti nibbānaṃ pati pesitatto. Kāmaṃ tadanuttaraṃ brahmacariyapariyosānaṃ…pe… vihāsīti imināva arahattanikūṭena desanā niṭṭhāpitā hoti, āyasmato pana seniyassa paṭipattikittanaparametaṃ ujukaṃ āpannaarahattabhāvadīpanaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘‘aññataro kho panā’’tiādivacananti āha ‘‘arahattanikūṭenevā’’ti. Arahattādhigamoyeva tassa tesaṃ abbhantaratā. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第8篇 无畏王子经的注释巴利
8. Abhayarājakumārasuttavaṇṇanā
83 83. 由于出身不相等、师承低劣,他是婢女之子,生在靠别人施舍过活的母亲腹中。以讥嫌的方式而说,因此说是诤论,也就是过失,所以说“提出诤论”就是提出过失。从投生的角度说,他应堕地狱;或者由于能招感地狱的业而系属于地狱,就是地狱众生。“恶趣者”在这里也是同样的道理。生在无间地狱后,在那里住一个被称为寿劫的中间劫,所以叫住劫者。以避开地狱投生的方式能够医治,所以是可医治;不能这样医治就是不可医治。“脱离两端”是指抛开或除去粗恶的或不悦的,即舍弃、不触碰那两个部分,将所问之义置于其外,就叫做吐出。然而他不能这样做到,所以说“不能吐出、不能取出到外面”。同样,这问题不应接受,这就是这里的过失,不作此问而除去它,就叫做吞下;然而不能那样做到而执持,就叫做不吞下;而世尊则连那义理的余地也不作,两方面都能,应知。如何呢?世尊说“大王,在此并非一向如此”,从而扭转尼乾子的意图,脱离两端而回答问题,这样就能吐出。又说“大王,在此并非一向如此”,显示“这问题不应这样不分别而问,应分别而问”,指出问题的过失,将其除去,也能吞下。巴利
83. Jātiyā asamāno nihīnācariyo paradattūpajīvikāya mātuyā kucchiyaṃ jāto pādasikaputto. Nindāvasena vadati etenāti vādo aguṇoti āha – ‘‘vādaṃ āropehīti dosaṃ āropehī’’ti. Nibbattavasena nirayaṃ arahati, nirayasaṃvattaniyena vā kammena niraye niyutto nerayiko. Āpāyikoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Avīcimhi uppajjitvā tattha āyukappasaññitaṃ antarakappaṃ tiṭṭhatīti kappaṭṭho. Nirayūpapattipariharaṇavasena tikicchituṃ sakkuṇeyyoti tekiccho, na tekiccho atekiccho. Dve ante mocetvāti pharusaṃ vā appiyaṃ vā kappeyyāti dve koṭṭhāse muñcitvā te anāmasitvā pucchitaṃ atthaṃ tato bahi karonto uggilati nāma. Taṃ pana evaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti āha – ‘‘uggilituṃ bahi nīharituṃ na sakkhitī’’ti. Evamevāyaṃ pucchā na gahetabbā, ayamettha dosoti taṃ apucchaṃ karonto apanayanto ogilati nāma, tathā pana asakkonto patiṭṭhāpento na ogilati nāma, bhagavā pana tamatthaṃ okāsampi akaronto ubhayathāpi asakkhīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Bhagavā hi ‘‘na khvettha rājakumāra ekaṃsenā’’ti vadanto nigaṇṭhassa adhippāyaṃ viparivatteti, ubho ante mocetvā pañhaṃ vissajjesi, evaṃ tāva uggilituṃ asakkhi. ‘‘Na tatra rājakumāra ekaṃsenā’’ti vadanto eva ca ‘‘nāyaṃ pucchā evaṃ avibhāgena pucchitabbā, vibhajitvā pana pucchitabbā’’ti pucchāya dosaṃ dīpento taṃ hārento ogilitumpi sakkhatīti.
他将无法站起来,因为心转向了别处。无畏已熟悉两条道路,善巧、敏锐,又喜欢争论,他到处走动。因此说:“他因为喜好争论而接受了那人的话,说‘是的,尊者’。”巴利
Uṭṭhātuṃ na sakkhissati cittassa aññathā pavattiyā. Abhayo dve magge kataparicayo cheko nipuṇo vādasīlo ca hutvā vicarati. Tenāha – ‘‘so vādajjhāsayatāya tassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchanto ‘evaṃ, bhante’ti āhā’’ti.
85 “这样的”指的是那些对他人来说不可爱、不合意、难听的言语,也就是那种言语,但并不是粗恶语。因为如来已经彻底断除了粗恶语的桥梁。实际上,只有思的粗恶才被认定为粗恶语,并不是仅仅因为让他人觉得不可爱就算。“尼干陀被摧毁了”,因为他们所认可的那类“可咽下”等问题,只用一句话就被击破了。巴利
85.Evarūpanti yā paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā duruttavācā, evarūpā vācā, na pana pharusavācā. Pharusavācāya hi setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Cetanāpharusatāya hi pharusavācā icchitā, na paresaṃ appiyatāmattena. Naṭṭhā nigaṇṭhā ogilikādisammatassa pañhassa ekavacanena viddhaṃsitattā.
86 86. 为了说明男孩坐在怀里的原因,说了“滑舌者”等话。其中,“滑舌者”指狡辩者,因为他们在论辩之道上还不圆满,或只靠一点滑舌就热衷于论辩。“陷入论战”指因为多次摧破他人之见而卷入论辩的交锋。“刺破”即用指甲刺破。“正是此”指:这个男孩是为了保护自己的论辩破绽才被放在怀里坐着的,我就以这个男孩作为比喻的依据,来攻破他的论辩。我心想:“我要用这个不牢靠的比喻来攻破他的论辩。”巴利
86. Dārakassa aṅke nisīdanassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘lesavādino’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha lesavādinoti chalavādino, vādamagge vā aparipuṇṇatāya lesamatteneva vādasīlā. Osaṭasaṅgāmoti anekavāraṃ paravādamaddanavasena otiṇṇavādasaṅgāmo. Vijjhitvāti nakhena vijjhitvā. Imamevāti yvāyaṃ dārako attano vādabhaṅgapariharaṇatthaṃ iminā aṅke nisīdāpito, imameva assa dārakaṃ upamaṃ nissayaṃ katvā vādaṃ bhindissāmi. ‘‘Assa vādaṃ appaṭitatāya upamāya bhañjissāmī’’ti cintetvā.
“我能把它拿走”,意思是“我能把那男孩口中的它拿走”。“不实”就是并非真实存在,因为省略了后半个词,所以解释说“不实即非真实”。“不真”是它的同义词,所以说“不真即非真”。或者,“不实”指不存在、没有;“不真”指呈现出不真实的样态。“无义相应”指与现世或来世的无益相应,或者与无义相应;也可以说,“非义”就是无义,是利益的反面,与它相应就是无义相应,这里说的是离间语和杂秽语。应当看出,这里已经包含了四种语恶行。巴利
Apaneyyaṃassa ahanti assa dārakassa mukhato ahaṃ taṃ apaneyyaṃ. Abhūtatthova abhūtaṃ uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘abhūtanti abhūtattha’’nti. Atacchanti tasseva vevacananti āha ‘‘atacchanti na taccha’’nti. Abhūtanti vā asantaṃ avijjamānaṃ. Atacchanti atathākāraṃ. Anatthasaṃhitanti diṭṭhadhammikena, samparāyikena vā anatthena saṃhitaṃ, anatthe vā saṃhitaṃ, na atthoti vā anattho, atthassa paṭipakkho sabhāvo, tena saṃhitanti anatthasaṃhitaṃ, pisuṇavācaṃ samphappalāpañcāti attho. Evamettha catubbidhassapi vacīduccaritassa gahitatā daṭṭhabbā.
“邪行”就是错误的行为。如来不说那种话,因为它被不真实等过失所染污。即使那话是真的,如来也不说,因为它被无益等过失所染污。巴利
Duppayuttoti duppaṭipanno. Na taṃ tathāgato bhāsati abhūtatādidosaduṭṭhattā. Tampi tathāgato na bhāsati bhūtatthepi anatthasaṃhitatādidosaduṭṭhattā.
有原因,所以称为“有处”,这是把字母 ka 改成 ya 构成的;不是处,所以是“非处”,没有理由、不合道理,这样的话就叫“非处语”。所谓“说自己亲证的话”,就是自己亲自证知之后,说出来的那种狡辩话。巴利
Ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ etissā atthīti ṭhāniyā ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā, na ṭhāniyāti aṭṭhāniyā, nikkāraṇā ayuttiyuttā, sā eva kathāti aṭṭhāniyakathā. Attapaccakkhakathaṃ kathemāti attanā eva paccakkhaṃ katvā pavattiyamānaṃ chalakathaṃ kathema.
村里的长老心想:“这些人想骗我,现在我要反过来骗他们了。”于是他说:“将来会变成这样”等等。他们甚至没法说“我们不是奴仆”,因为之前就是这样约定好的。巴利
Gāmikamahallako ‘‘ime maṃ vañcetukāmā, ahameva dāni ime vañcessāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘evaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Na mayaṃ dāsā’’tipi vattuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu pubbe tathākatikāya katattā.
第三,就是第三次:在两种情形里,都是第三次开口说话。不超越应当说的时机:对某人应当在什么时候、以什么方式说,他就在那时照那样而说,由于如此说,不超越应当说的理由和应当说的时机而说。巴利
Tatiyaṃ tatiyamevāti dvīsupi pakkhesu tatiyaṃ tatiyameva vācaṃ. Bhāsitabbakālaṃ anatikkamitvāti yassa yadā yathā bhāsitabbaṃ, tassa tadā tatheva ca bhāsanato bhāsitabbaṃ kāraṇaṃ bhāsitabbakālañca anatikkamitvāva bhāsati.
87 以“处生起智”来说,就是在它该生起的地方才生起的智慧。也就是在种种因缘中,针对各种具体情形而生起的智慧。诸法如实地被了知,这种了知的体性就是“法性”。对一切法、对真实之法毫无遗漏地如实把握,这就叫“法界”,也就是一切知性。因此说:“这是一切知智的异名。”“善通达”是指以彻底通达的方式,善巧地通达一切所知之法,也就是完全通达的意思。因此说:“已入世尊掌中。”针对可引导的人,以这样的方式将四圣谛完全揭示出来,从而现前证得阿拉汉果。巴利
87.Ṭhānuppattikañāṇenāti ṭhāne eva uppajjanakañāṇena. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāraṇe tassa taṃ taṃ avatthāya uppajjanakañāṇena, dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato avabujjhanasabhāvoti dhammasabhāvo. Dhamme sabhāvadhamme anavasese vā yāthāvato upadhāretīti dhammadhātu, sabbaññutā. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Suppaṭividdhanti sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanavasena, suṭṭhu paṭividdhanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘hatthagataṃ bhagavato’’ti. Neyyapuggalavasena pariniṭṭhitāti kathāparivibhāgena ayameva desanā cattāri ariyasaccāni dassento arahattaṃ paccakkhāsīti.
《多受经》注释巴利
9. Bahuvedaniyasuttavaṇṇanā
88 “五支”这个称呼,是因为他做木匠活时,靠的是斧头等五样工具组合起来,所以叫“五支”。又因为能把柱子之类的东西立起来,所以叫“木匠”。这位是贤者优陀夷长老,不是咖鲁达义长老。巴利
88.Pañcakaṅgoti vaḍḍhakīkiccasādhane vāsiādipañcakaṃ aṅgaṃ saṃdhanaṃ etasminti pañcakaṅgo. Thambhādivatthūnaṃ thapanaṭṭhena thapati. Paṇḍitaudāyitthero, na kāḷudāyī thero.
89 “异门”是指使自身的结果得以产生的方式,也就是原因。感受所依止的身心状态就是原因。因此说:“应当从身和心两方面来了知。”其中,依止于净色身的是“身受”,依止于心的是“心受”。依乐等而有三受:在这里,乐、苦、不苦不乐就是乐受等的原因。把它们作为生起的相状,于是乐等名称便由此产生;按照这个道理,其余各处也应当根据情况确定其原因之后再说。“近伺”是指靠近所缘,以特殊的方式活动。对于某个所缘生起悦受时,就以该所缘为对象而靠近它,由于具有不同于其他受的殊胜特性,便在那里以特殊的方式活动。因此说:“他近伺能引生喜悦的色。”其余诸受也是同样的道理。“家所系”是指被系缚于在家生活。巴利
89. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ vattetīti pariyāyo, kāraṇaṃ. Vedanāsannissito ca kāyikacetasikabhāvo kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘kāyikacetasikavasena dve veditabbā’’ti. Tattha pasādakāyasannissitā kāyikā, cetosannissitā cetasikā. Sukhādivasena tissoti ettha sukhanadukkhanupekkhanāni sukhādivedanāya kāraṇaṃ. Tāni hi pavattinimittāni katvā tattha sukhādisaddappavatti, iminā nayena sesesupi yathārahaṃ kāraṇaṃ niddhāretvā vattabbaṃ. Upavicāravasenāti ārammaṇaṃ upecca savisesapavattivasena. Yasmiñhi ārammaṇe somanassavedanā pavattati, ārammaṇatāya taṃ upagantvā itaravedanāhi visiṭṭhatāya savisesaṃ tattha pavatti. Tenāha ‘‘somanassaṭṭhāniyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicaratī’’ti. Esa nayo sesavedanāsu gehassitānīti gehanissitāni.
90 “以异门”这句话,是针对“我在这里说,这也是苦”这个说法而讲的。为了显示这一点:虽然在经里从“阿难,有两种受”开始,是以两种受为起点来展示各种受,但同时也正是在显示只有一种受。为了支持这个观点:我说过以异门的方式只有一种受,既然如此,两种受等也应当可以说——他就是这样来支持自己的主张。那么,只有一种受是怎么说的呢?就是“凡是所感受到的,无论是乐、是苦、还是不苦不乐,我都说这在这里是苦”。这里其余应当说明的内容,可以按照《如是语注》中《胜义明灯》所说的方法来理解。巴利
90.Pariyāyenāti ‘‘idamettha dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vadati. Taṃ dassentoti kāmañcettha sutte – ‘‘dvepānanda, vedanā vuttā’’ti dve ādiṃ katvā vedanā dassitā, ekāpi pana dassitā evāti dassento. Upatthambhetunti ekāpi vedanā vuttā mayā pariyāyena, evaṃ sati dvepi vattabbāti evaṃ tassa vādaṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Kathaṃ pana ekā vedanā vuttāti? Yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā, idamettha dukkhasminti vadāmīti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ itivuttakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (itivu. aṭṭha. 52 ādayo) paramatthadīpaniyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
那么,这里为什么说色界第四禅、无色界诸定以及想受灭定中的乐被举出呢?于是他说“在此”等话。所谓“以寂静之义”,是指与它相反的诸法已经止息的状态。所谓“以殊胜之义”,是指通过修习上的特殊成就而达到的无热恼状态,以及最上的状态;另外,由于特殊的助缘而被导向主要状态,这也叫殊胜。所谓“感受乐”,是把它当作属于受的乐。所谓“非感受乐”,是说只要达到完全没有痛苦的程度,就称之为乐。或者说,灭尽定能彻底“吃掉”、灭除身体和精神上的种种苦迫,因为即使在这定中七天,苦也会被灭尽,所以配得上这个说法。因此他说“以无苦的状态为本质的乐义”。巴利
Kathaṃ panettha rūpāvacaracatutthe arūpesu saññāvedayitanirodhe sukhaṃ uddhatanti āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Santaṭṭhenāti paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ vūpasantabhāvena. Paṇītaṭṭhenāti bhāvanāvisesavisiṭṭhena atappakabhāveneva seṭṭhabhāvena ca, paccayavisesena padhānabhāvaṃ nītantipi paṇītaṃ. Vedayitasukhaṃ nāma vedanābhūtaṃ sukhanti katvā. Avedayitasukhaṃ nāma yāvatā niddukkhatā, tāvatā sukhanti vuccatīti.Atha vā nirodho suṭṭhu khādati khanati kāyikacetasikābādhanti vattabbataṃ arahati sattāhampi tattha dukkhassa nirujjhanato. Tenāha ‘‘niddukkhabhāvasaṅkhātena sukhaṭṭhenā’’ti.
91 无论在哪一种存在状态、哪一种心识生起、或哪一种心境状态下,只要那种无苦的性质——即苦的对立面,因苦不可得而远离了苦——就被安立为乐。剩下的部分很容易理解。巴利
91.Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ bhave, cittuppāde, avatthāya vā niddukkhabhāvo, dukkhassa paṭipakkhatā anupalabbhanena dukkhavivittaṃ, taṃ sukhasmiṃyeva paññapeti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第10章《无讹经》的注释巴利
10. Apaṇṇakasuttavaṇṇanā
93 “种种”是指持种种不同见解的沙门和婆罗门:仅仅因为出家就是沙门,仅仅因为出身就是婆罗门。“见”就是见解。“执取”就是固执地抓住、取著。他们这样想要抓住自己的见解,所以来发问。“没有见,世间就不能出离”:意思是,如果没有属于解脱修习的那一种见,世间就无法从轮回之苦中脱离出来。他们连一种见都站不住脚,因为没有信的成分。事实上,他们正是通过这个开示而立足于皈依处。因为对不颠倒、值得相信的事所生起的信,才叫作“有理的”,所以,世间那种不颠倒的说法开示,就是这里所说的;这信以“世间的不颠倒法开示即是此”的方式转起,是成就道之信的因;因为以它为因,所以称为依止于它的信,也就是“有理的”。而在没有根据的事上生起的信,因为因由不合理,就不是有理的。“有理的”这个词并不只是表示“存在”,而应当理解为表示“殊胜”或“值得赞叹”。因此,“有理的”在这里的意思就是:依靠值得相信的事而有的殊胜之因,或者说值得赞叹之因。“无猜”在这里是说:譬如为了达成某种目的而开始行动,如果行动失败了,在那里就像没有起作用一样,因为还得重新开始;而不会失败的行动,因为能达成目的,所以是“无猜”。同样,这个法因为能克服而决定性地生起,所以被称为“无猜”。因此说“不会失败、不犹豫而行、决定性地执取”。巴利
93.Nānāvidhāti nānāvidhadiṭṭhikā samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjāmattena samaṇā, jātimattena brāhmaṇā ca. Dassananti diṭṭhi. Gahitanti abhinivissa gahitaṃ. Iti te attano dassanaṃ gahetukāmā pucchanti. Vinā dassanena loko na niyyātīti vimokkhabhāvanāya ekena dassanena vinā loko saṃsāradukkhato na nigacchati. Ekadiṭṭhiyampi patiṭṭhātuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu saddhākārābhāvato. Tathā hi te imāya desanāya saraṇesu patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Yasmā aviparīte saddheyyavatthusmiṃ uppannasaddhā ‘‘ākāravatī’’ti adhippetā, tasmā yo loke aviparītadhammadesanā, ayamevesāti pavattā maggasādhanagatāya saddhāya kāraṇabhāvato tannissayā saddhā, sā ākāravatīti vuttā. Avatthusmiñhi saddhā ayuttakāraṇatāya na ākāravatī. Ākāravatīti ettha vatī-saddo na kevalaṃ atthitāmattadīpako, atha kho atisayatthadīpako pāsaṃsatthadīpako vā daṭṭhabbo. Tena ākāravatīti saddheyyavatthuvasena atisayakāraṇavatīti vā pāsaṃsakāraṇavatīti vā ayamettha attho. Apaṇṇakoti ettha yathā kañci atthaṃ sādhetuṃ āraddhassa payogo viraddho, tattha akārako viya hoti punapi ārabhitabbatāya. Aviraddho pana atthassa sādhanato apaṇṇako, evaṃ ayampi dhammo abhibhavitvā pavattanato ekaṃsato ‘‘apaṇṇako’’ti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘aviraddho advejjhagāmī ekaṃsagāhiko’’ti.
94 成为那邪见的对立面。巴利
94.Tabbipaccanīkabhūtāti tassā micchādiṭṭhiyā paccanīkabhūtā.
95 “它们”是指善法。从“不善”中出来的状态,就是没有杂染的状态。“功德”是指纯粹的果报。“清净之分”是指清净、洁白的状态。对不真实之法的邪见状态的说明,就是对不真实之法的说明。在有过失的事物中,执取最严重的过失——邪见,那怎么还会有善戒的执持呢?所以说:“正在执持邪见的人,他的善戒已经被断除了。”这里说的“邪见等”:其中,邪思惟是指思虑他世不存在;邪语是指说出他世不存在的言论,也就是妄语;还有成为诸圣者的对立面等等。“以一次又一次地生起之力”:是指在心中反复生起的力量。“诸罪恶不善法”:是指在观察、说明等时候生起的、这样运作的不善蕴。巴利
95.Nesanti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Akusalato nikkhantabhāveti asaṃkiliṭṭhabhāve. Ānisaṃsoti suddhavipākatā. Visuddhipakkhoti visuddhibhāvo pariyodātatā. Abhūtadhammassa diṭṭhibhāvassa saññāpanā ācikkhanā abhūtadhammasaññāpanā. Sāvajjesu paramavajje micchādassane paggahaṇanti kuto susīlyassa paggahoti āha – ‘‘micchādassanaṃ gaṇhantasseva susīlyaṃ pahīnaṃ hotī’’ti. Micchādiṭṭhiādayoti ettha micchāsaṅkappo paralokābhāvacintā, micchāvācā paralokābhāvavādabhūto musāvādo, ariyānaṃ paccanīkatādayo. Aparāparaṃ uppajjanavasenāti punappunaṃ citte uppajjanavasena. Pāpakā akusalā dhammāti paccavekkhaṇasaññāpanādikāle uppajjanakā tathāpavattā akusalakhandhā.
“失利执”就是对没有好处的东西的执取。而它之所以被称为“落败执”,是因为它在这一世和来世都会导致失败,所以这样说。“恶执持”这里,“恶”这个字也要带到“受持”上来搭配理解,所以说是“恶执持”。就像被恶执持一样,那样受持就被说成恶执持、不善受持。“唯充满己见”就是顽固地认定自己的“无有”论为“唯有这才是真的,其他都是虚妄”,不让其他见解有立足之地,从而遍满己见。因此说“胜解”。“已正觉”等,是显示胜解的方式。“舍离”就是远离、除去,因此说“避开”。巴利
Kaliggahoti anatthapariggaho. So pana yasmā diṭṭheva dhamme abhisamparāyañca parājayo hotīti āha ‘‘parājayaggāho’’ti. Dussamattoti ettha du-saddo ‘‘samādinno’’ti etthāpi ānetvā yojetabboti āha ‘‘dupparāmaṭṭho’’ti. Yathā dupparāmaṭṭho hoti, evaṃ samādinno dussamatto dusamādinno vutto. Sakavādameva pharitvāti attano natthikavādameva ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187; 3.27-28) avadhārento aññassa okāsaadānavasena pharitvā. Tenāha ‘‘adhimuccitvā’’ti. ‘‘Sambuddho’’tiādi adhimuccanākāradassanaṃ. Riñcatīti viveceti apaneti. Tenāha ‘‘vajjetī’’ti.
96 已作执取是指把一切都当成已经完成、已经成就来执取。而因为那是获得胜利,所以说为胜利执取。
善执取是指以妥善完成的方式执取。
善把握是指通过反复不断地修习而妥善地把握。
这两者都表明:那种业已经做过、已经积集起来,而且能带来安稳,因为它能导向投生天界,也能断除邪恶的本性。巴利
96.Kaṭaggahoti kataṃ sabbaso siddhimeva katvā gahaṇaṃ. So pana jayalābho hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘jayaggāho’’ti. Suggahitoti suṭṭhukaraṇavasena gahito. Suparāmaṭṭhoti suṭṭhu parāparaṃ āsevanavasena āmaṭṭho . Ubhayenapi tassa kammassa katūpacitabhāvaṃ dasseti, sotthibhāvāvahattañca saggupapattisaṃvattanato pāpasabhāvapahānato ca.
97 “亲手做”是指亲自去做。在这里,应舍离的、固定的等做法,也都包括在“亲手做”里面。说到“煮、烧、伤害”,注释里说“用棍杖逼迫”。“自己制造忧愁”是指自己给别人制造忧愁的因,或者自己让忧愁生起。“由他人”是指听自己话的人。“自己也颤动”是指因为对别人施加伤害的行为,自己也跟着颤动。“杀害”这个词,既适用于亲自杀,也适用于让别人杀,所以说“对杀的人、对让别人杀的人也是如此”。巴利
97.Sahatthā karontassāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.166; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.3.211) sahattheneva karontassa. Nissaggiyathāvarādayopi idha sahatthakaraṇeneva saṅgahitā. Pacanaṃ dahanaṃ vibādhananti āha ‘‘daṇḍena pīḷentassā’’ti. Sokaṃ sayaṃ karontassāti parassa sokakāraṇaṃ sayaṃ karontassa, sokaṃ vā uppādentassa. Parehi attano vacanakarehi. Sayampi phandatoti parassa vibādhanapayogena sayampi phandato. Atipātayatoti padaṃ suddhakattuatthe hetukattuatthe ca vattatīti āha ‘‘hanantassapi hanāpentassāpī’’ti.
房屋的墙壁在内侧和外侧相连接而成立的地方,就是“屋缝”。一点都不剩下、彻底地全部剥取,就是“全剥”。专门在同一间屋子里行窃的贼,就是“单间贼”。在道路上到处拦路杀害,就是“拦路贼”。恶不会被造作,因为对于先前不存在的东西,根本无法令它生起,所以说“没有恶”。如果这样,那众生为什么会造恶呢?他回答说:“然而众生想着‘我们在做’,就有了这样的想。”据说他是这样认为的:“这些众生的伤害等行为,并不会触及自己,因为它具有恒常性、不变异性;而身体则是无意识的,如同木块与柴薪;即使对它加以破坏,也没有任何恶。”所谓“以剃刀轮”,就是以锐利的剃刀所成的轮。“恒河的南岸是不适当地域,北岸是适当地域”,基于这个意图,而说了“南岸……”等语,因此说道“南岸的人们粗暴……”等。巴利
Gharassa bhitti anto bahi ca sandhitā hutvā ṭhitā gharasandhi. Kiñcipi asesetvā niravasesameva lopoti nillopo. Ekāgāre niyutto vilopo ekāgāriko. Parito sabbaso panthe hananaṃ paripantho. Pāpaṃ na karīyati pubbe asato uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tasmā natthi pāpaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sattā pāpaṃ paṭipajjantīti āha – ‘‘sattā pana karomāti evaṃsaññino hontī’’ti. Evaṃ kirassa hoti ‘‘imesañhi sattānaṃ hiṃsādikiriyā na attānaṃ phusati tassa niccatāya nibbikārattā, sarīraṃ pana acetanaṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamaṃ, tasmiṃ vikopitepi na kiñci pāpa’’nti. Khuranemināti nisitakhuramayaneminā. Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇadisā appatirūpadeso, uttaradisā patirūpadesoti adhippāyena ‘‘dakkhiṇañce’’tiādi vuttanti ‘‘dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā’’tiādimāha.
“大祭祀”是指像大胜王举行的大祭祀那样的大供养。“以戒律自制”是指以身体和语言的防护来约束自己。“以实语”是指说真实的话。把实语单独分开来说,是因为在世间,实语被视为更重的福德。正如在恶法当中妄语严重,在福德法当中实语也是如此。所以世尊说:“有一法,人若违越……”等(《法句经》176颂)。“依已说之理”就是按照黑分部分所说的道理。在那里说的是“没有恶,恶不会到来”,而在这里说的是“有福德,福德会到来”,只有这一点不同。其余部分与前面所说的相同,这是指“对他们,这是可以期待的”等,与先前所说的那一阶段相似。巴利
Mahāyāganti mahāvijitayaññasadisaṃ mahāyāgaṃ. Sīlasaṃyamenāti kāyikavācasikasaṃvarena. Saccavacanenāti saccavācāya. Tassa visuṃ vacanaṃ loke garutarapuññasammatabhāvato. Yathā hi pāpadhammesu musāvādo garu, evaṃ puññadhammesu saccavācā. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘ekaṃ dhammamatītassā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 176). Vuttanayenevāti kaṇhapakkhe vuttanayena. Tattha hi – ‘‘natthi pāpaṃ, natthi pāpassa āgamo’’ti āgataṃ, idha ‘‘atthi puññaṃ, atthi puññassa āgamo’’ti āgataṃ, ayameva viseso. Sesaṃ vuttasadisamevāti ‘‘tesametaṃ pāṭikaṅkha’’nti evamādiṃ sandhāya vadati, taṃ heṭṭhā purimavārasadisaṃ.
100 “以两者”这句话,是通过否定因与缘来说的。“杂染的缘”,是指众生在轮回中流转、被染污而变得秽恶的原因。按相反的道理,“清净的缘”这个词的意思也应该这样理解。在“力”等词中,有被称为努力、能给众生带来杂染或清净的力,有被称为勇猛气势的精进,有应当由人展现的男子气力,也有同一个人为了到达一个又一个境地而付出的男子勇毅——但这些都不存在,都找不到。巴利
100.Ubhayenāti hetupaccayapaṭisedhavacanena. Saṃkilesapaccayanti saṃsāre paribbhamanena kilinnassa malinabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Vuttavipariyāyena visuddhipaccayanti saddattho veditabbo. Balantiādīsu sattānaṃ saṃkilesāvahaṃ vodānāvahañca ussāhasaṅkhātaṃ balaṃ vā, sūravīrabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ vā, purisena kattabbo purisathāmo vā, so eva paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanappattiyā purisaparakkamo vā natthi na upalabbhati.
由于与“有”相应,又因为对色等对象执著,所以称为有情。依呼吸的运作而活命,所以称为命。不过,他接着按单根等类别来分类说明,因此说“单根”等。因为在卵壳等处出生,所以称为生类,因此说“卵壳……等他们说”。因为维持生命而活着,又因为增长,所以称为命者。对于有情、命、生类、命者这些词,应当这样理解它们的词义。他们没有在杂染和清净方面的自主力,所以是无自在。他们没有力量和精进,所以是无力的、无精进的。所谓决定性,就像穿在不可切断之线上的不可破坏宝石一样,因为他们的转起是决定性的,所以从断除趣、生、结的角度说为决定。在各处投生,是指六种生类在各自的趣中投生,以及以会合方式聚集。就是本性,就像荆棘的尖锐、木苹果果实的浑圆、鹿和鸟等种种不同的形态,一切世间也是如此这般地无因无缘而转变,这就是本性,不是人为造作的。因此说“因为……”等。巴利
Satvayogato, rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya ca sattā. Pāṇanato assāsapassāsavasena pavattiyā pāṇā. Te pana so ekindriyādivasena vibhajitvā vadatīti āha ‘‘ekindriyo’’tiādi. Aṇḍakosādīsu bhavanato bhūtāti vuccantīti āha ‘‘aṇḍakosa…pe… vadantī’’ti. Jīvanato pāṇaṃ dhārento viya vaḍḍhanato jīvāti evaṃ sattapāṇabhūtajīvesu saddattho veditabbo. Natthi etesaṃ saṃkilesavisuddhīsu vasoti avasā. Natthi nesaṃ balaṃ vīriyañcāti abalā avīriyā. Niyatatāti acchejjasuttāvutābhejjamaṇi viya niyatapavattanatāya gatijātibandhapajahavasena niyāmo. Tattha tattha gamananti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tāsu tāsu gatīsu upagamanaṃ samavāyena samāgamo. Sabhāvoyevāti yathā kaṇṭakassa tikkhatā, kabiṭṭhaphalānaṃ parimaṇḍalatā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittākāratā, evaṃ sabbassapi lokassa hetupaccayena vinā tathā tathā pariṇāmo, ayaṃ sabhāvoyeva akittimoyeva. Tenāha ‘‘yena hī’’tiādi.
杀鸟的人就叫捕鸟者,杀猪的人也一样叫屠猪者。猎人则泛指任何打猎杀生的人。因为从事恶业,他们被称为黑生类。比丘是指释迦族的比丘,外道因为比丘吃鱼肉,就说他们是蓝生类。比丘们即使吃的是如法得来的资具,外道因为自己的邪命教义与此相违,就诽谤说:他们在资具里插进荆棘然后吃下去。有些出家人特别热衷于自我折磨的苦行,他们就像站在荆棘上一样,所以被称为棘刺行者。因为奉行站着吃饭、拒绝接受布施等誓愿,他们显得更加洁白。裸形者弟子是指邪命外道的弟子。据说他们在邪命外道教义下内心清净,所以比尼干陀更洁白。难陀等人因为具备这样的修行,所以被认为比尼干陀和邪命外道弟子更洁白,被称为白生类。巴利
Sakuṇe hanatīti sākuṇiko, tathā sūkariko. Luddoti aññopi yo koci māgaviko nesādo. Pāpakammapasutatāya kaṇhābhijāti nāma. Bhikkhūti sākiyā bhikkhū, macchamaṃsakhādanato nīlābhijātīti vadanti. Ñāyaladdhepi paccaye bhuñjamānā ājīvakasamayassa vilomagāhitāya ‘‘paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādantī’’ti vadanti. Eke pabbajitā, ye savisesaṃ attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā. Tathā hi te kaṇṭake vattentā viya hontīti kaṇṭakavuttikāti vuttā. Ṭhatvā bhuñjanadānapaṭikkhepādivatasamāyogena paṇḍaratarā. Acelakasāvakāti ājīvakasāvake vadati. Te kira ājīvakaladdhiyā visuddhacittatāya nigaṇṭhehipi paṇḍaratarā. Nandādayo hi tathārūpāya paṭipattiyā pattabbā, tasmā nandādayo nigaṇṭhehi ājīvakasāvakehi ca paṇḍaratarāti vuttā ‘‘sukkābhijātī’’ti.
这就是他们的主张:他们认为,众生因为转生为捕鸟者之类的身份,在黑生类等状态中感受苦与乐,依次耗尽八万四千大劫之后,再转生为邪命外道,安住在最白的生类中,由此从轮回中得到清净。这就是邪命外道所持的“决定说”。巴利
Ayametesaṃ laddhīti sākuṇikādibhāvūpagamanena kaṇhābhijātiādīsu dukkhaṃ sukhañca paṭisaṃvedentā anukkamena mahākappānaṃ cullāsītisahassāni khepetvā ājīvakabhāvūpagamanena paramasukkābhijātiyaṃ ṭhatvā saṃsārato sujjhantīti ayaṃ tesaṃ niyati ājīvakānaṃ laddhi.
说“没有布施”的人,是在否定布施的果报,所以经文说“无布施见否定异熟”。下面也是同样解说的:“无布施见否定存在。”无因见则否定两者,也就是业和异熟。因为持这种见的人说“众生没有因、没有缘而杂染,没有因、没有缘而清净”,他既然说业和异熟都不是杂染与清净的缘,就等于否定了这两者。异熟被否定,是因为没有业就没有异熟;业被否定,是因为没有异熟,业就成了没有意义。“就义理而言”,是指就它本身的性质来说。虽然这些见被分别说成一种一种,但所有这类无布施见等,其实每一种都是否定两方面的三种见,只是按无布施见等名称各自区分而已。因为“否定两者”这句话是从原因的角度说的,“无因论者”等则是从所主张的见解来说的。一个人通过否定异熟而成为无布施见者,从义理上讲,他也就通过否定业而成为无作业见者,并通过否定两者而成为无因见者。其余两种见也是同样的道理。巴利
‘‘Natthi dinna’’nti vadanto natthiko dānassa phalaṃ paṭikkhipatīti āha – ‘‘natthikadiṭṭhi vipākaṃ paṭibāhatī’’ti. Tathā ceva heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitaṃ ‘‘natthikadiṭṭhi hi natthitamāhā’’ti. Ahetukadiṭṭhi ubhayanti kammaṃ vipākañca ubhayaṃ. So hi ‘‘ahetū apaccayā sattā saṃkilissanti visujjhantī’’ti vadanto kammassa viya vipākassapi saṃkilesavisuddhīnaṃ paccayattābhāvavacanato tadubhayaṃ paṭibāhati nāma. Vipāko paṭibāhito hoti asati kamme vipākābhāvato. Kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti asati vipāke kammassa niratthakabhāvāpattito. Atthatoti sarūpena. Ubhayapaṭibāhakāti visuṃ visuṃ taṃtaṃdiṭṭhitā vuttāpi sabbe te natthikādayo natthikadiṭṭhiādivasena paccekaṃ tividhadiṭṭhikā eva ubhayapaṭibāhakattā. ‘‘Ubhayapaṭibāhakā’’ti hi hetuvacanaṃ. Ahetukavādā cātiādi paṭiññāvacanaṃ. Yo hi vipākapaṭibāhanena natthikadiṭṭhiko, so atthato kammapaṭibāhanena akiriyadiṭṭhiko, ubhayapaṭibāhanena ahetukadiṭṭhiko ca hoti. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
“诵习”是指先掌握那部阐明邪见的书,然后读诵它。“思察”是指去推究那部书的义理。“他们……”等句,是在显示思察的方式。“在那个所缘上”,是指以虚妄计度、宣说业与果报不存在的“无布施”等说法所生起的见解,其所缘就是那个。“邪念”得以安住:对于从传闻得来的“无布施”等义理,以符合那种方式的种种思惟,使心像面对具体形相一样,以本来面目呈现出来;由于长时间的反复熏习,达到“就是这样”而能审察认可的地步,对如此执取的东西一再地那样练习、反复修习,被邪思惟所摄持,又得到邪精进的支撑,于是把非那种性质的东西执取为“就是那种性质”。这样,与那种见解俱行、被称为“邪念”的渴爱就安住了。“心成为专一”:由于获得如前所说的思惟等条件,心停驻在那个所缘上,舍弃了散乱不专一的状态,变得像是被安止固定住一样专一。因为邪定依靠特定条件的殊胜作用以及由此产生的修习力量,有时确实也能起到类似定心专注的作用,就像在射穿毛发等技艺上一样,应当这样理解。“诸速行心在速行”:以那种方式在前期阶段的速行心刹那中多次运转之后,在最后那个速行心刹那中,有七个速行心生起。不过在第一个速行心时,它们还是可以救治的,第二乃至后面的也是如此——这是对法之本性的开示,并不是说在那个刹那,有谁能令它们变成可以救治的。巴利
Sajjhāyantīti taṃ diṭṭhidīpakaṃ ganthaṃ uggahetvā paṭhanti. Vīmaṃsantīti tassa atthaṃ vicārenti. Tesantiādi vīmaṃsanākāradassanaṃ. Tasmiṃ ārammaṇeti yathāparikappitakammaphalābhāvadīpake ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattāya laddhiyā ārammaṇe. Micchāsati santiṭṭhatīti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādivasena anussavūpaladdhe atthe tadākāraparivitakkanehi saviggahe viya sarūpato cittassa paccupaṭṭhite cirakālaparicayena ‘‘evameta’’nti nijjhānakkhamabhāvūpagamanena nijjhānakkhantiyā tathā gahite punappunaṃ tatheva āsevantassa bahulīkarontassa micchāvitakkena samādiyamānā micchāvāyāmupatthambhitā ataṃsabhāvaṃ ‘‘taṃsabhāva’’nti gaṇhantī micchāsatīti laddhanāmā taṃladdhisahagatā taṇhā santiṭṭhati . Cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti yathāvuttavitakkādipaccayalābhena tasmiṃ ārammaṇe avaṭṭhitatāya anekaggaṃ pahāya ekaggaṃ appitaṃ viya hoti. Micchāsamādhipi hi paccayavisesehi laddhabhāvanābalehi kadāci samādhānapatirūpakiccakaro hotiyeva vālavijjhanādīsu viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Javanāni javantīti anekakkhattuṃ tenākārena pubbabhāgiyesu javanavāresu pavattesu sabbapacchime javanavāre satta javanāni javanti. Paṭhamajavane pana satekicchā honti, tathā dutiyādīsūti dhammasabhāvadassanametaṃ, na pana tasmiṃ khaṇe tesaṃ satekicchabhāvāpādanaṃ kenaci sakkā kātuṃ.
其中,“于此”是指在三种邪见之中。“有人进入一种见”:如果某人只对一种见解产生执著并反复修习,他就只进入一种见;如果他对两种或三种见解产生执著并反复修习,他就进入两种或三种见。以此说明:先前以“遮止两者”的方式所说、从义理上成立的一切见状态,还只是前行阶段。而真正进入邪定的人则不同,他们是各自依其特定条件的聚合而成就的,由于所缘不同,就像获得不同殊胜证得的人不会彼此合在一起一样,这些见解也是互不混杂的。“即使只进入一种见”等文句,是为了显示这三种见具有同等的力量和同等的果报。因此,这三种见即使在同一个人身上生起,也是互不混杂的;当其中一种见给出了果报,其余两种见便成为提供助力的支持者。“轮回牢桩”这个词,其含义并不直白,需要加以解释,所以说“这又是什么呢”等语。不善法本身微弱无力,不像善法那样具有大力,因此说“只在一个自体中是决定的”。如果不是这样,邪定就会像正定一样成为究竟性的了。如果真是那样,那么“轮回牢桩”这个说法又怎么能成立呢?于是说“然而,从反复修习的角度来说”等语。因此,就像“一旦沉没,就是沉没了”所说的那样,这就是“轮回牢桩”的含义。因为,一个人依某种条件进入某种见之后,不能说以后遇到与之相反的条件时,他就再也不能从那里面冒出头来。所以说了“大多数情况下”。巴利
Tatthāti tesu tīsu micchādassanesu. Koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamatīti yassa ekasmiṃyeva abhiniveso āsevanā ca pavattā, so ekaṃyeva dassanaṃ okkamati. Yassa pana dvīsu, tīsupi vā abhinivesanā pavattā, so dve tīṇi okkamati. Etena yā pubbe ubhayapaṭibāhanatāmukhena vuttā atthasiddhā sabbadiṭṭhikatā, sā pubbabhāgiyā. Yā pana micchattaniyāmokkanti bhūtā, sā yathāsakaṃ paccayasamudāgamasiddhito bhinnārammaṇānaṃ viya visesādhigamānaṃ aññamaññaṃ ekajjhaṃ anuppattiyā asaṃkiṇṇā evāti dasseti. Ekasmiṃ okkantepītiādinā tissannampi diṭṭhīnaṃ samānabalataṃ samānaphalatañca dasseti, tasmā tissopi cetā ekassa uppannā aññamaññaṃ abbokiṇṇā eva, ekāya vipāke dinne itarā anubalappadāyikā honti. Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmāti idaṃ vacanaṃ neyyatthaṃ, na nītatthanti taṃ vivaritvā dassetuṃ kiṃ panesātiādi vuttaṃ, akusalaṃ nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ, na kusalaṃ viya mahābalanti āha – ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato’’ti. Aññathā sammattaniyāmo viya micchattaniyāmopi accantiko siyā. Yadi evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇukajotanā kathanti āha ‘‘āsevanavasena panā’’tiādi, tasmā yathā ‘‘sakiṃ nimuggo nimuggova hotī’’ti (a. ni. 7.15) vuttaṃ, evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇukajotanā. Yādise hi paccaye paṭicca ayaṃ taṃtaṃdassanaṃ okkanto puna kadāci tappaṭipakkhe paccaye paṭicca tato sīsukkhipanamassa na hotīti na vattabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti.
因此,正因为不善之人也是轮回牢桩状态的因缘,所以这样说。希望增长的人,是指想凭借自身功德,在现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益方面获得增长的人。不过,这里有些人说:就像经过长时间修习,善法成熟而获得力量,从而彻底断除一切不善法一样;不善法也能通过更长时间的修习获得力量,在某个时候连善法也断尽。这样一来,那些具有坚固邪见倾向的邪见者,其所谓轮回牢桩的状态也就能成立了。这就像所谓的雨季论者之见。这种说法不对。因为属于邪定聚的法,仅靠长时间的修习,并不具备断除对立法的能力。实际上,能断除的作用是依法的自性而成立的,由殊胜因缘所赋予的力量,以断除为自性——这是就修习善法者而言;而应被断除的性质,则是对不善法说的,正如以见应断等理趣所示。不善法的微弱无力,也如“弱者被强者所胜”等语所示。即使通过推理或名称可以了知,这里也不应让听者怀疑所立之法的特殊性,因为要成立的是特殊性,而听者所理解的却是普遍性,所以省略了“吠陀”一词,正如在说明声音的自性时,不能因为与纯净的推理等相违就认为不可能。因为不可能像外光一样,依据色身来安立中间光为色法、为眼识所识等。如果说中间光因为无碍,所以像受一样,那么仅仅以智光就能像消除无明黑暗一样消除一切善法被某种不善法断尽的必然性,这也就成立了。关于轮回牢桩的责难,该说的前面已经说过了,所以这些愚人众人的吹嘘就到此为止吧。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ saṃsārakhāṇubhāvassapi paccayo akalyāṇajano, tasmā. Bhūtikāmoti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena attano guṇehi vaḍḍhikāmo. Yaṃ panettha keci vadanti ‘‘yathā cirakālabhāvanāya paripākūpagamaladdhabalattā upanissayakusalā akusale sabbaso samucchindanti, evaṃ akusaladhammā tatopi cirakālabhāvanāsambhavato laddhabalā hutvā kadāci kusaladhammepi samucchindanti. Evañca katvā daḷhamicchābhinivesassa micchādiṭṭhikassa vaṭṭakhāṇukabhāvajotanāpi samatthitā hotī’’ti yathā taṃ ‘‘vassabhaññānaṃ diṭṭhī’’ti, taṃ na, micchattaniyatadhammānaṃ cirakālabhāvanāmattena na paṭipakkhassa pajahanasamatthatā, atha kho dhammatāsiddhena paccayavisesāhitasāmatthiyena attano pahāyakasabhāvena pahāyakabhāvo bhāvanākusalānaṃyeva vutto, akusalānaṃyeva ca pahātabbabhāvo ‘‘dassanena pahātabbā’’tiādinā nayena, akusalānaṃyeva dubbalabhāvo ‘‘abalānaṃ balīyantī’’tiādinā (su. ni. 776; mahāni. 5) (yuttināpi nāmato vā adhigamaniyo āloko ālokabhāvato bāhirāraṇekā viya na cettha paṭiññatte bhāvesatā sotuno āsaṃkitabbā visesavassa sādhetabbato sāmaññassa ca sotubhāvena adhippetattā veda-saddassa lopo dīpe sabhāve sādhane yathā taṃ saddayabhāvassa nāpi visuddhakaanumānādivirodhasambhāvato. Na hi sakkā antarālokassa bāhirālokassa viya rūpakāyaṃ upādāya rūpatā cakkhuviññeyyattādike patiṭṭhāpetuṃ sakkāti vuttaṃ, nanupi antarāloko aviggahattā vedanā viyāti saddheva ñāṇālokassa avijjandhakārā viya vidhamaniyabhāve sabbesampi kusaladhammānaṃ kenacipi akusaladhammena samucchindaniyatā siddhāva hoti). Vaṭṭakhāṇukacodanāya yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttamevāti tiṭṭhatesā bālajanavikatthanā.
103 由禅那心所成,是指由色界禅那心所生起的。正因为他们特别是由禅那之意所生起,所以称为“意所成”;但若不加区分地说,一切众生也都是由造作之意所生起,因此全都是意所成。“想所成”在这里也是同样的道理。因此说“由无色界禅那想所成”。“此”是指修习无色界状态的人。“未得禅那的人”是指尚未证得色界禅那的人。“他也”则包括那些仅仅靠推理思辨的人。对于色界禅那,由于他们已通过传闻获得了确定的判断,所以没有疑惑。巴利
103.Jhānacittamayāti rūpāvacarajjhānacittena nibbattā. Tathā hi tesaṃ visesena jhānamanasā nibbattattā ‘‘manomayā’’ti vuttā, avisesena pana abhisaṅkhāramanasā sabbepi sattā manomayā eva. Saññāmayāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘arūpajjhānasaññāyā’’ti. Ayanti rūpitābhāvapaṭipajjanakapuggalo. Appaṭiladdhajjhānoti anadhigatarūpajjhāno. Tassapīti takkinopi. Rūpajjhāne kaṅkhā natthi anussavavasena laddhavinicchayattā.
104 “有贪”是指处于有贪的状态。“在近处”是指靠近。之所以说它是“有贪”,并不是因为它离那不坚固的见不太远,也不是因为它与贪相应。这种不坚固的见,据说会对属于轮回的诸法生起染著,因此论中说:“以贪欲的力量,在轮回中染著。”一切结也都以渴爱的方式生起,因此又说:“以渴爱的方式,为了结缚。”至于“对无色界他没有疑惑”,这是针对他通过传闻获得确定见解的情况说的。诚然,“无布施”等邪见必定导致恶趣之苦,其“不虚假”已经很明显;但这里说的“不虚假”,是依直接义,指能成就无过失之义的保证,论主据此提出质疑;而回答则是进一步承认:即使所成就的是有过失之义,它也同样确定不移,以此化解质疑。因此他说“以执取的方式”等等。这表明,按照通俗惯用语,“无布施”等也成了“不虚假”的组成部分。巴利
104.Sārāgāyāti sarāgabhāvāya. Santiketi samīpe, na thāmagatā diṭṭhinātidūrattā sarāgā, na sampayuttattā. Sā hi na thāmagatā vaṭṭapariyāpannesu dhammesu rajjatīti viññāyatīti āha – ‘‘rāgavasena vaṭṭe rajjanassā’’ti. Sabbepi saṃyojanā taṇhāvaseneva sambhavantīti āha – ‘‘taṇhāvasena saṃyojanatthāyā’’ti. Āruppe panassa kaṅkhā natthīti anussavavasena laddhanicchayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ duggatidukkhānaṃ ekantasaṃvattanena natthikadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ apaṇṇakatā pākaṭā eva, nippariyāyena pana anavajjassa atthassa ekantasādhakaṃ apaṇṇakanti katvā codanā, sāvajjassapi atthassa sādhane ekaṃsikabhāvaṃ gahetvā parihāro. Tenāha ‘‘gahaṇavasenā’’tiādi. Tena ruḷhīvasena ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādīni apaṇṇakaṅgāni jātānīti dasseti.
105 下面三类人:在这个四类分组里,“自苦行者”和“令他苦行者”等三类,就是下面这三类人。如前所说的那五类人,全都是修行不如法的人;而“实有论者”等五类人,因为是修行如法的人,在这个四类分组中,就只归为第四类人。为了说明这个道理——前面所说的两组五类人,都能归入这个四类分组——为了以分别开示不如法的修行和如法的修行,世尊才开始了这个教说。至于其中在义理上没有详细分辨的部分,本来就很容易理解。巴利
105.Heṭṭhātayo puggalāva hontīti attantapo parantapoti imasmiṃ catukke heṭṭhā tayo puggalā honti. Yathāvuttā pañcapi puggalā duppaṭipannāva, tato atthikavādādayo pañcapuggalā sammāpaṭipannatāya imasmiṃ catukke eko catutthapuggalova hoti. Etamatthaṃ dassetunti idha heṭṭhā vuttapuggalapañcakadvayaṃ imasmiṃ catukke eva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti vibhāgena duppaṭipattisuppaṭipattiyo dassetuṃ bhagavā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhīti. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.